Titration Excellence Terminal - bikeitech.combikeitech.com/DATAS/es_free2/f_496e83687d150.pdf ·...

204
Operating Instructions Titration Excellence Terminal

Transcript of Titration Excellence Terminal - bikeitech.combikeitech.com/DATAS/es_free2/f_496e83687d150.pdf ·...

Operating Instructions

Titration Excellence Terminal

Table of Contents

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 I

PageContents1. Introduction 1

2. Functional Description 32.1 Layout of the Terminal 32.2 Operating the Touchscreen 42.3 The User Interface 42.3.1 The Home Screen 52.3.2 Entering Data in the User Interface. 62.3.3 Sorting Lists 72.3.4 The Task Menu (T70/T90 only) 72.3.5 Shortcuts and Direct Shortcuts 82.3.6 The Analysis Start Screen 82.3.7 The Online Screen 9

3. Setup (Setup) 113.1 Overview of the Menu Structure for the Setup Menu 123.2 Chemicals 133.2.1 Titrant 133.2.2 Auxiliary Reagents 143.2.3 Calibration Standard 153.2.4 Titer Standards 183.2.5 Substances 183.3 Hardware 193.3.1 Sensors 193.3.2 Pumps 293.3.3 Peripherals 293.3.4 Titration Stands 353.3.5 Auxiliary Instruments 383.4 User Settings 403.4.1 Language 403.4.2 Display 403.4.3 Sounds 413.4.4 Shortcuts 413.4.5 Keyboards 423.5 Global Settings 433.5.1 System 433.5.2 User Management 453.5.3 Performance of Analyses and Resources 483.6 Values 523.6.1 Blanks 523.6.2 Auxiliary Values 533.7 Service & Maintenance 543.7.1 MT-Service 543.7.2 Import/Export 553.7.3 Resetting Factory Settings 563.7.4 Software History 563.7.5 Firmware 563.7.6 Terminal 563.7.7 Board Data 563.7.8 Drives 573.7.9 Burettes 573.7.10 Upgrade (only for T70) 573.7.11 Update 573.8 Monitoring the Expiration Date and Life Span of Resources 583.8.1 Monitoring the Expiration Date of a Resource 583.8.2 Monitoring the Life Span of a Resource 59

Table of Contents

II METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.9 Sensor Calibration 603.9.1 Linear Calibration 603.9.2 Segmented Calibration 61

4. Methods 634.1 Starting Methods 644.1.1 Starting Methods from the Method Editor 644.2 Establishing Methods 644.3 Modifying Methods 654.4 Deleting Methods 664.5 Method Syntax – Rules for Establishing Methods 674.5.1 Possible Number of Method Functions 674.5.2 Types of Methods 684.5.3 Types and Possible Number of Loops 684.5.4 Entering and Deleting Loops 694.5.5 Method Functions Within a Loop 704.5.6 Method Functions Outside of a Loop 714.6 Overview of Method Functions 724.7 Method Function Settings 73 Title 73 Sample 74 Sample (titer) 75 Sample (calibration) 75 Titration stand 76 Rinse 78 Conditioning 79 Pump 80 Park 80 Stir 81 Dispense (normal) 81 Calculation 82 Drain 84 Record 85 End of sample 86 Titer 86 Calibration 87 Auxiliary value 88 Blank value 89 Auxiliary instrument 90 Instruction 93 Measure (normal) 95 Measure (MVT) 98 Titration (EQP) 100 Titration (EP) 105 Titration (2-phase) 109 Titration (EQP detection) 114 Stating 116 Dispense (controlled) 1204.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band 122

5. Manual operations (Manual) 1235.1 Stirrer 1245.2 SENSOR 1245.2.1 Temperature sensor 1255.2.2 Potentiometric Sensor 1255.2.3 Polarized Sensor 1265.2.4 Conductivity Sensor 1285.3 Burette 129

Table of Contents

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 III

5.3.1 Rinse burette 1295.3.2 Dispense 1305.3.3 Manual titration 1315.4 Pump 1345.5 Auxiliary Instrument 1345.6 Sample changer 138

6. Series templates 1416.1 Sample series 1416.2 Series sequence [T90] 1426.3 Free sample series 1436.4 Sample parameters 144

7. Processing sequence of an analysis 1477.1 Start of an analysis 1477.2 Processing sequence of an analysis 150

8. Results 1538.1 All results 1538.2 Add result 1538.3 Statistics 1548.3.1 Outlier test 1548.4 Recalculate 1568.5 Samples 1568.6 Reevaluate 1578.7 Undo changes 1588.8 Delete all results 158

9. Evaluate and calculate 1599.1 Analysis data 1599.2 Indexing of method functions 1609.3 Naming conventions for using analysis data in calculations 1619.4 Formulas 1659.4.1 Mathematical Functions and Operators 1669.4.2 Using analysis data in formulas 1669.5 Explanatory examples 1699.5.1 Titration method function 1699.5.2 Stating method function 1729.6 Titrator evaluation procedure 1749.6.1 Standard Evaluation Procedure 1749.6.2 Minimum/Maximum 1759.6.3 Segmented 1759.6.4 Asymmetrical 1769.7 Sample formulas 1779.8 Constants within a Content Calculation 178

10. Appendix 18110.1 Predefined Calibration Standards 18110.2 METTLER Methods 18910.3 Application Modes 19010.4 Method Templates 191

Index 193

Table of Contents

IV METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Introduction

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 1

1. Introduction

Titration excellence – simple, efficient, secure

The instruments in METTLER TOLEDO's Titration Excellence Line are modern, modular titrators for use in a wide range of applications. They can be used in quality control as well as in research and development. With their wide array of applications, they can satisfy the most stringent requirements.

The titrators in the Titration Excellence Line combine simple, easy-to-use functions with the most flexible, outstanding analytical efficiency. Rapid titrant change is made easy thanks to a new procedure that detects titrant automatically (Burette Plug & Play – PnP). The titrator automatically recognizes the titrant needed without the need for any action by the user. Even installing sample changers and additional dosing units makes manual adjustments superfluous.

Titration Excellence instruments can be controlled by means of a terminal and/or LabX PC software. The terminal is a large color touch screen that allows for intuitive user guidance that can be adjusted to each user. All functions can be accessed directly from the main screen via customizable shortcuts which, when used on a daily basis, lighten the workload considerably. Operating the titrator using a terminal is described in detail in this operating instructions manual.

The various titrator operating instructions available when using LabX PC software is illustrated in separate operating instructions entitled "LabX for Titration Excellence".

The following separate installation information describes all of the steps necessary to install and begin operating your Titration Excellence instrument. The "Quick Guide" will then guide you through the first titration process using a practical example. If you have any additional questions, METTLER TOLEDO is always available to assist you.

Introduction

2 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Functional Description

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 3

2. Functional Description

2.1 Layout of the Terminal

The control panel of the terminal consists of an integrated touchscreen (d) and four additional buttons (a, b and 2 x c), which are located outside of the touch-sensitive interface of the display:

• The Reset button (a) ends all tasks that are currently running.• The Info button (b) activates the interactive online help for the contents of the current screen.• Two Home buttons (c) always take you back to the Home screen (to the left and right of the dis-

play).

You can press these four buttons any time, regardless of which screen you are currently in.

• The Reset button is a kind of "EMERGENCY OFF" switch. If the titrator malfunctions or there is an operating error, you can stop all current tasks by pressing the reset button. Afterward, for each task, you can decide whether to end it completely or continue.

a b

c

d

Functional Description

4 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

2.2 Operating the Touchscreen

With the exception of the four buttons, the titrator is operated exclusively using the integrated touchscreen and the On/Off button on the titrator.Simply touch the touch-sensitive surface of the display with your fingertip or fingernail to select a button or entry element.

• Never touch the surface of the touchscreen with pointed or sharp objects! Doing so can damage the touchscreen!

2.3 The User Interface

The graphical user interface consists of five basic elements (a-e). The title bar (a) at the top of the display indicates the name of the current screen.The task button, located in the top right corner, uses animation to indicate whether a task is running. You can access the task menu anytime by pressing the task button, which displays an overview of all tasks currently running (with the T50, or when only one task is operating, you can get to the current task directly by pressing the task button). From the task menu, you can jump to any task currently running. The navigation bar, located below the title bar, displays the path to the current screen.The scroll bar (d), located on the right side of the screen, will be visible as soon as the contents of the screen are beyond the viewable range. If this occurs, use either the arrows or the area in between them to move the viewable area of the screen up or down.

(A maximum of) five blue softkeys (e) are located at the bottom of the display. The function of these but-tons varies and depends on the context of the current menu.

Functional Description

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 5

2.3.1 The Home Screen

The Home screen is the first screen that appears after starting the titrator. You can come back to this screen at anytime by pressing the Home button.

The Home screen contains five buttons (c), which take you to the individual submenus:

• Methods: This button takes you to the Method Editor where you can create and manage methods. (See "4. Methods")

• Series Templates: In this menu, series of individual samples can be created and managed, e.g. when using a sample changer. (See "6. Series Templates")

• Results: Manage the results of your analysis here. (See "8. Results")• Setup: The hardware and resources the titrator uses are configured in the Setup. Both global and

user settings are also assigned here. (See "3. Setup")• Manual: This button takes you to manual operations. Stirrers, sensors, pumps, etc. can be oper-

ated here independently from analyses. (See "5. Manual Operations (Manual)")

There is yet another area (b) that can be configured for every user (with the necessary authorization). 12 shortcuts per user can be stored here. By using these shortcuts (a), defined methods, series and manual operations can be started directly from the Home screen. (See "2.3.5 Shortcuts and Direct Shortcuts")

Functional Description

6 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

2.3.2 Entering Data in the User Interface.

There are different types of input fields in the user interface where you can either enter data or select data from a list. Input fields can also be deactivated and their contents are then displayed as information only and cannot be changed in the corresponding menu.The various types of input fields are identified by an icon to the right of the screen:

Text input fields Any text comprised of letters, numbers and symbols can be entered into these fields.

Number input fields Numbers, formulas and auxiliary values can be entered into these fields. In some fields an auxiliary value can be selected from the Auxiliary Values list by pressing the "H" button.

Drop-down lists By selecting these fields, a drop-down list will open from which you can select an entry.

List fields By selecting these fields a menu list will open in a new window.

Menu fields By selecting these fields, a new screen will open with a number of additional menu options.

Formula fields A formula must be entered in these fields. You can enter these manually or access a menu list by pressing the "Suggestion" softkey.

Deactivated (Info field)

The values in deactivated input fields are displayed as information only and cannot be edited in the corresponding menu.

Deactivated checkbox (No) In addition to the input fields there are checkboxes that can be checked in order to select certain functionalities. Check-boxes can affect the scope of the corresponding menu, i.e. input fields can be hidden or visible depending on whether the checkbox is checked.

Activated checkbox (Yes)

• Limits for the input fields (number of characters for text input fields, minimum and maximum values, and number of decimal points for number input fields) are entered into the respective entry display screen:

Functional Description

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 7

2.3.3 Sorting Lists

All of the lists displayed in the user interface can be sorted by column alphabetically or numerically in ascending or descending order. To do this, simply touch the header row of the list (b) in the column by which you would like to sort the list. A little arrow (a) in the header row indicates the column by which the list is sorted and whether it is sorted in ascending or descending order.

2.3.4 The Task Menu (T70/T90 only)

The task menu is accessed via the task button (in the top right corner of the display screen) and provides an overview of all tasks that are currently running. Selecting one of the individual tasks from the list will take you back to the respective online screen where you can end the task.

Functional Description

8 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

2.3.5 Shortcuts and Direct Shortcuts

Shortcuts allow you to start methods, series and manual operations from the homepage. You can place up to twelve different shortcuts on the homepage by pressing the "AddToHome" softkey button. "AddToHome" softkeys are located on the methods, series and manual operations start screens.

• Shortcuts are user-specific, i.e. each individual user can create a maximum of twelve shortcuts for the tasks they personally conduct the most with the titrator.

The titrator supports two types of shortcuts. Direct shortcuts which, when selected, start immediately without warning (only if the other settings allow this), and normal shortcuts which take you to the cor-responding start screen from which you can start the task.

Shortcuts for methods, series or manual operations that bring you the corresponding start screen.

Shortcuts for methods, series or manual operations with integrated reference symbols in the icon that start the corresponding task when selected provided the other settings allow for it.

Shortcuts are managed in Setup, under the subcategory "User Settings". This is where shortcuts can be deleted or modified, and their position on the Home screen changed. (See "3.3.4 Shortcuts")

• As soon as the maximum number of (12) shortcuts have been created on the Home screen, the AddToHome button in the start screen for methods, series and manual operations will be deacti-vated.

• Caution: Tasks started using the shortcuts can begin immediately without warning. Therefore, always make sure that all tubes are connected to suitable vessels prior to using a shortcut.

For an explanation of the settings available when creating a shortcut, see "7.1 Starting an Analysis".

2.3.6 The Analysis Start Screen

An analysis, whether a single or multiple determination, can be started on the titrator in a number of ways:

• By using the "Start" softkey in the Method Editor• By using the "Start" softkey on the Home screen• By using a shortcut (or direct shortcut) on the Home screen• By using the "Start" softkey in the "Series" menu• By using the "Calibrate" or "Titer" softkeys in the "Setup" menu (to perform a calibration or titer

determination)

The analysis start screen is always the first screen that appears after using a softkey ("Start", "Calibrate" or "Titer") or a shortcut.

Functional Description

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 9

• When a direct shortcut is activated, the analysis start screen will not appear and the respective method will start immediately, provided that the other settings allow this.

The parameters for the previously used method or series will appear in the analysis start screen so that the same method can immediately be started again.

Of course, all of the settings can also be adjusted prior to pressing the "Start" softkey. The type and number of settings displayed in the analysis start screen depends on the type of analysis to be started and the resources used.

For an explanation of the settings available when starting an analysis from the analysis start screen, see "7.1 Starting an Analysis".

2.3.7 The Online Screen

The online screen is displayed when an analysis or manual operation is being performed.

The method ID of the current method or the type of manual operation is displayed in the title bar. In the navigation bar below, the sample index, displayed as "Sample 2/5" (second of a total of five samples) and loop index, displayed as "Loop 1/3" (first of three loops) are shown. (The loop index will only be displayed if the method actually contains more than one loop (available only with T70 and T90)). The navigation path will be displayed in the navigation bar while a manual operation is being performed.

Functional Description

10 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

The remainder of the online screen is divided into a graphical area (left) and a data area (right). The measured curve is displayed in the graphical area during a titration or measurement in which the unit to be displayed on each axis can be chosen from a predefined selection. In addition to the online screen, you can also display a table of measured values during the titration or measurement.

Depending on the type of method function being performed, the online screen displays various data such as measured values, remaining run times, volume dispensed, stirrer speed, duration of the analysis or temperature.

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 11

3. Setup (Setup)

In this chapter you will learn how to adjust the titrator settings according to your requirements.

In order to perform a titration, the resources that are used in the method (titrants, sensors, peripherals, etc.) must be installed and configured. The setup, which helps you install these resources, is divided into the following areas:

Setup area Description

Chemicals All types of chemicals such as titrants, auxiliary reagents and stan-dards for titer determination and calibration standards can be defined here.

Hardware In this menu you can define the hardware components of your titra-tion system, such as sensors, titration stands, pumps and auxiliary instruments.

User settings User-defined settings, such as language, display settings or shortcuts can be assigned here.

Global settings System settings can be established here that apply to every user.

Values Blank and auxiliary values can be specified under "Values".

Service & maintenance Here the user can assign actions to be taken regarding the servicing and maintenance of the titrator.

The "Expired resources" buttonOn the overview screen of the setup menu you will find the "Expired resources" button. By pressing this button you go to an overview of all expired resources with the type, name and date of expiry of the respective resource.

Resources that were selected during setup in "Monitoring expiration dates" and/or "Monitoring life span" may be expired. See "3.8 Monitoring the Expiration Dates and Life Span of Resources".

Setup

12 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.1 Overview of the Menu Structure for the Setup Menu

Chemicals ------------------- Titrants

Auxiliary reagents

Calibration standards

Titer standards

Substances

Hardware ------------------- Sensors

Pump

Peripherals

Titration stands

Auxiliary instruments

User settings ------------------- Language

Screen

Sounds

Shortcuts

Keyboards

Global settings ------------------- System

User management

Performance of analyses and resources

Values ------------------- Blanks

Auxiliary values

Service & maintenance ------------------- MT-Service

Import/Export

Reset to factory settings

Software history

Firmware

Terminal

Board data

Drives

Burettes

Upgrade

Update

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 13

3.2 Chemicals

All chemicals such as titrants, titer and calibration standards, auxiliary reagents and other substances are configured and managed under the menu, "Chemicals".Lists of the chemicals already defined in the system can be viewed and printed at any time, and new chemicals can be defined and existing ones can be deleted.

• Auxiliary reagents must be assigned to a pump to which they can be added, and titrants (regard-less of type) must each be assigned to a drive.

3.2.1 Titrant

The following settings can be edited and viewed for each titrant:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Type The type of titrant. Either "General titration" for a classic titrant or "Auxiliary reagent" if you want to use a burette to dispense an auxiliary reagent.

General titration | Auxiliary reagent

Name Select any name for the titrant. Arbitrary

Concentration The concentration of the titrant, in [mol/L]. (For "type" = "general titration" only.)

0.00001 … 100

Concentration The non-dimensional concentration of an auxiliary reagent. (For "type" = "auxiliary reagent" only.)

0.00001 … 10000

Titer The titer for the titrant. (For "type" = "general titra-tion" only.)

0.00001 … 10

Determination method

Contains eather the entry "Manual" if the value for the titer was entered manually or the ID of the method used to determine the titer. (For "type" = "general titration" only.) (Info field)

Manual | Method ID

Date/Time Either the date and time the titer was entered manu-ally or the date and time the titer was determined by means of a method. (For "type" = "general titration" only.) (Info field)

Date/Time

Performed by Name of the user who entered or determined the ti-ter. (For "type" = "general titration" only.) (Info field)

User name | LabX operator

Monitoring expi-ration dates

Specifies whether to monitor the expiration date during which the titer is used. (See "3.8.1 Monitor-ing the Expiration Date of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration" only.)

Yes | No

Monitoring life span

Specifies whether to monitor the life span of the titrant. (See "3.8.2 Monitoring the Life Span of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration".)

Yes | No

Lot/Batch The lot or batch of the titrant. Enter any designation. Arbitrary

Fill rate The filling rate of the burette in percent. 100% stands for maximum filling rate.

30 … 100

Burette volume The volume of the burette. Choices are 1, 5, 10 and 20 mL.

1 | 5 | 10 | 20

Drive Defines the drive on which you will use the burette containing the titrant. You can select the "PnP" entry for available but unused PnP burettes.

1 … 8 | PnP

Setup

14 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Serial number You can enter the serial number of the burette con-taining the titrant here. For PnP burettes the system will enter this number automatically, but you will be able to change it.

Arbitrary

• A maximum of 100 titrants can be defined in the titrator.

3.2.2 Auxiliary Reagents

Auxiliary reagents are liquid chemicals that can be used to aid the titration process. Auxiliary reagents must be added using a pump and can be used via the method functions "Pumps" and "Rinsing".The following settings can be viewed and edited:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Select any name for the auxiliary reagent. Arbitrary

Pump You can use this setting to select a pump from the pump list in the setup.

Pump list

Pump output The pump output assigned to the selected pump. (As defined in the pump setup.)(Info field)

List of available pump outputs.

• A maximum of 50 auxiliary reagents can be defined in the titrator.

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 15

3.2.3 Calibration Standard

In addition to the predefined calibration standard lists for pH and conductivity sensors shown in the ap-pendix, user-defined calibration standard lists can also be managed.In this menu, you can view and print the predefined lists stored in the titrator, and create additional user-defined calibration standard lists for pH buffers and ISE and conductivity standards.

First you have to create a new calibration standard list. The following settings are available for this:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Type Defines the type of calibration standard list to be created. The type will depend on the type of the sensor to be calibrated. For a calibration list of the "Auto pH" type, the titrator will identify the standards automatically. The type selected will define the value range for the "unit of measure" parameter.

pH | Auto pH | ISE | Con-ductivity

Name Select any name for the new calibration standard list.

Arbitrary

Unit Enter the unit of measure for the calibration standard, depending on the type of the calibration standard list.

pH (for "pH" and "auto-pH" types)pM | pX | ppm (for "ISE" type)mS/cm | µS/cm (for "con-ductivity" type)

Base list To create an auto pH calibration standards list, you must select suitable pH buffers from an existing base list.

Calibration standard-List

Ref. temperature The reference temperature in [°C] that all the stan-dards or pH buffers of a calibration standard list will reference.

-20.0 … 200.0

After you have created a calibration standard list, you can add various buffers and standards to this list, depending on the type selected:

For a calibration standard list for "pH", see "3.2.3.1 Adding a pH Calibration Standard (pH Buffer)"For a calibration standard list for "auto-pH", see "3.2.3.2 Adding a pH Calibration Standard (pH Buffer) to an Auto-pH Calibration Standard List"For a calibration standard list for "ISE", see "3.2.3.3 Adding an ISE Calibration Standard (ISE Standard)"For a calibration standard list for "conductivity", see "3.2.3.4 Adding a Conductivity Calibration Standard (Conductivity Standard)"

• To delete a user-defined calibration standard list from the titrator, you first have to view the settings of the list using the "Info" softkey. From this menu you can delete the calibration standard list from the titrator memory by selecting "delete".

• A maximum of 20 user-defined calibration standard lists and 10 auto-pH buffer lists can be defined in the titrator.

Setup

16 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.2.3.1 Adding a pH Calibration Standard (pH Buffer)After you have created a "pH" calibration standard list, you can add various pH buffers to thid list by us-ing "New". To do so, enter the respective pH value of the buffer, based on the reference temperature from the calibration standard list:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Ref. temperature The reference temperature in [°C] that was defined when creating the calibration standard list.(Info field)

-20.0 … 200.0

pH value The pH value of the pH buffer at the reference temperature.

0 … 20

To display the temperature influence of a pH buffer, you can enter a maximum of 20 variant pairs for each individual buffer composed of the temperature and corresponding pH value:Select a buffer and press "New".

Parameter Explanation Value range

Temperature The temperature in [°C], for which the pH value of the pH buffer has been entered.

-20.0 … 200.0

pH value The pH value of the pH buffer at the temperature defined with the setting "Temperature".

0 … 20

This is how you can create a complete calibration standard list according to the lists already stored in the titrator.

3.2.3.2 Adding a pH Calibration Standard (pH Buffer) to an Auto pH Calibration Standard ListFor a calibration list of the "Auto pH" type, the titrator will identify the various pH buffer automatically. In order to ensure positive identification, the pH values of the individual solutions have to differ from each other by at least two points.You can add the calibration standard lists of various pH buffers by selecting them from the specified base list. By doing so, the titrator offers only suitable pH buffers in order to ensure that the selected pH buffers always differ from each other by at least two pH points.

• The temperature influence of the individual pH buffers is also be taken from the base list and can only be viewed but not changed.

3.2.3.3 Adding an ISE Calibration Standard (ISE Standard)After you have created an "ISE" calibration standard list, you can add this list to various ISE standards by using "New". To do this, enter the corresponding value for the standard in the desired unit of measure, based on the reference temperature from the calibration:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Ref. temperature The reference temperature in [°C] that was defined when creating the calibration standard list.(Info field)

-20.0 … 200.0

Standard value The value of the ISE standard at the reference tem-perature in the desired unit of measure.

-100 … 100

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 17

To display the temperature influence of an ISE standard, you can enter a maximum of 20 variant pairs for each individual standard composed of the temperature and corresponding standard value: Select a buffer and press "New".

Parameter Explanation Value range

Temperature The temperature in [°C] for which the standard value is entered.

-20.0 … 200.0

Standard value The pH value of the ISE standard at the temperature defined with the setting "Temperature".

-100 … 100(for pM and pX)0.000 … 1000000(for ppm)

Thus you can create a complete calibration standard list for ISE sensors.

3.2.3.4 Adding a Conductivity Calibration Standard (Conductivity Standard)After you have created a "Conductivity" calibration standard list, you can add various conductivity stan-dards to this list by using "New". To do this, enter the conductivity for each standard based on the reference temperature from the calibration standard list:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Ref. temperature The reference temperature in [°C] that was defined when creating the calibration standard list.(Info field)

-20.0 … 200.0

Conductivity The conductivity value of the standard in the unit selected with "Unit".

0.000 … 1000000(for mS/cm)0.00 … 1000000(for µS/cm)

To display the temperature influence of a conductivity standard, you can enter a maximum of 20 variant pairs for each individual standard composed of the temperature and corresponding conductivity value: Select a buffer and press "New".

Parameter Explanation Value range

Temperature The temperature for which the conductivity of the standard has been specified.

-20.0 … 200.0

Conductivity The conductivity value of the standard in the unit selected with "Unit".

0.000 … 1000000(for mS/cm)0.00 … 1000000(for µS/cm)

This is how you can create a complete calibration standard list for conductivity sensors.

Setup

18 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.2.4 Titer Standards

The titer standard required for determining the titer for the titrant you used can also be stored and managed in the titrator. The following parameters can be edited and viewed for each titer standard:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Type Defines whether it is a liquid or solid standard. Solid | Liquid

Name Select any name for the standard. Arbitrary

Purity The purity of a solid standard, in percent.(For "type" = "solid" only.)

0.001 … 100000

Concentration The concentration of a liquid standard, in [mol/L].(For "type" = "liquid" only.)

0.00001 … 100

m The molar mass of a solid standard, in [g/mol]. 0.00001 … 1000

Density The density of a liquid standard, in [g/ml].(For "type" = "liquid" only.)

0.0001 … 100

Equivalent num-ber

The equivalent number z of the standard 1 … 9

Lot/Batch The number of the standard. Arbitrary

Date/Time The date and time the standard was created or changed (references the "Lot/Batch" setting).(Info field)

Date/Time

Performed by Name of the user who entered or determined the titer.(Info field)

User name | LabX operator

Monitoring expi-ration dates

Specifies whether to monitor the expiration date during which the same lot/batch is used. (See "3.8.1 Monitoring the Expiration Date of a Re-source") (For "type" = "general titration" only.)

Yes | No

• A maximum of 50 titer standards can be defined in the titrator.

3.2.5 Substances

In the menu "Substances", any chemical substances that are required for conducting the analysis can be managed using name, empirical formula, molecular weight and equivalent number.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Select any name for the substance. Arbitrary

Empirical formula The total molecular formula of the substance. Arbitrary

Molecular weight You can enter the molecular weight of the sub-stance here.

0.0001 … 10000

Equivalent num-ber

The equivalent number of the substance. 1 … 9

• A maximum of 100 substances can be defined in the titrator.

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 19

3.3 Hardware

In this menu you can configure all of the hardware components connected to the titrator, such as:

• Sensors• Pumps• Peripherals (instruments such as printers or balances)• Titration stands• Auxiliary instruments (such as valves or filling level sensors)

3.3.1 Sensors

Sensors to be used with the titrator can be configured and managed in this menu.You can view and print the list of all sensors defined in the titrator, add and delete sensors, and change settings already stored in the titrator.The settings for an individual sensor can also be output to a printer.In addition, the corresponding method for sensor calibration can be accessed from here.

• A maximum of 50 sensors can be defined in the titrator.

Each sensor is associated with a specific type. Each sensor type can deliver measured values in one or more units of measure. The following table provides information regarding which units of measure can be selected for a corresponding sensor type:

Sensor type Default unit of measure Eligible units of measure

mV Sensor mV mV

pH sensor pH pH | mV

ISE sensor pM pM / pX | ppm | mV

Phototrode %T %T | A | mV

Polarized sensor mV mV | µA

Temperature sensor °C °C | K | °F

Conductivity sensor µS/cm µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS

• Changing the unit of measure for a sensor can cause the calibration parameters and expiration date settings to deactivate and be omitted, the titrator to change the calibration parameters (for temperature sensors), or it can cause the titrator to show another set of calibration parameters (for ISE sensors).

Setup

20 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

The following settings are initially available when creating a new sensor in the titrator:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Sensor type The type of the sensor. mV | pH | Phototrode | Polarized | Temperature | Conductivity | ISE

Additional settings are available when configuring a sensor depending on the sensor type selected:

3.3.1.1 mV Sensors

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Select any name for the sensor. Arbitrary

Unit The unit of measure for the sensor to be defined. mV

Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. AB1/SENSOR1 | AB1/SEN-SOR2 (more depending on equipment)

Serial number You can enter a serial number for the sensor here. Arbitrary

Monitoring life span

Specifies whether to monitor the life span of the sensor. (See "3.8.2 Monitoring the Life Span of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration".)

Yes | No

3.3.1.2 pH Sensors

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Select any name for the sensor. Arbitrary

Unit The unit of measure for the sensor to be defined. mV | pH

Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. AB1/SENSOR1 | AB1/SENSOR2 (more depending on equip-ment)

Serial number You can enter a serial number for the sensor here. Arbitrary

Calibration Defines the calibration type. (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.)

Linear | Segmented

Cal

ibra

tion

type

"Li

near

"

Zero point The zero point of the pH sensor in the unit [pH]. (Zero point, slope and corresponding calibration temperature are required to convert the mV signal of the sensor to the "pH" unit.)(Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.)

-100 … 100

Slope (TCalib) The slope of the sensor at the calibration tempera-ture in [mV/pH]. (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.)

-100 … 100

Slope (25.0 °C) The slope of the pH sensor in [mV/pH], based on a temperature of 25 °C. This field will update auto-matically every time the parameters "Slope [mV/pH]" or "Calibration Temperature [°C]" are changed. (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Slope The slope of the sensor in [%]. The titrator automat-ically calculates the number in this field using the "Slope [%] = Slope [mV/pH] (25 °C)/-59.16 * 100"(Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

-169.0 … 169.0

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 21

Cal

ibra

tion

type

"se

gmen

ted"

Number of seg-ments

This parameter is adjusted automatically by the cal-ibration method used. All subsequent parameters will be adjusted to match the number of segments. The system records two numbers per segment (zero point and slope). x-1 segment boundaries are entered for x segments. The maximum possible calibration is for 9 points (resulting in 8 segments). (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only) (Info field)

3 … 9

Zero point 1 The zero point of the sensor for the 1st segment in [pH]. (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Slope 1 (TCalib) The sensor gradient in [mV/pH for the 1st segment at calibration temperature. (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Slope 1 (25 °C) The pH sensor gradient in [mV/pH] for the 1st Seg-ment, umgerechnet auf eine Temperatur von 25 °C. (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Slope 1 Slope 1 of the sensor in [%]. The titrator automati-cally calculates the number in this field using the "Slope 1 [%]=Slope [mV/pH] (25 °C)/-59.16 * 100"(Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Cal

ibra

tion

type

"se

gmen

ted"

Seg. boundaries 1,2 [pH]

Specifies the segment boundary between Segments 1 and 2 in [pH]. (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Zero point 2 The zero point of the sensor for the 2nd segment in [pH]. (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Slope 2 (TCalib) The sensor gradient in [mV/pH] for the 2nd segment at calibration temperature. (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.)

-100 … 100

Slope 2 (25 °C) The zero point of the sensor for the 2nd segment in [mV/pH], recalculated for a temperature of 25 °C (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Slope 2 [%] The slope of the sensor in [%]. The titrator auto-matically calculates the number in this field using the "Slope 2 [%] = Slope [mV/pH] (25 °C)/-59.16 * 100"(Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

-100 … 100

… etc.

Internal temperature sensor

If the sensor has an internal temperature sensor, you can select "yes" here. In this case the system will automatically make an entry in the sensor setup for the internal temperature sensor.

Yes | No

Calibration temperature The temperature during calibration in [°C]. (Ap-pears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field for seg-mented calibration)

-20 … 200

Calibration method The titrator fills this field in automatically. The entry is either filled in as "Manual" if manual changes were made to the calibration parameters, or it is filled in with the name of the method if the sen-sor was calibrated with the aid of the "Calibrate" method function.(Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

Manual | Name of the calibration method

Date/Time Date and time of the last calibration. (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

Date/Time

Setup

22 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Performed by The name of the user or LabX user logged in during the last calibration. (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.) (Info field)

Logged-in user | LabX user

Monitoring expiration dates

Specifies whether to monitor the expiration date of the sensor. (See "3.8.1 Monitoring the Expiration Date of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titra-tion" only.) (Appears for "unit" = "pH" only.)

Yes | No

Monitoring life span Specifies whether to monitor the life span of the sensor. (See "3.8.2 Monitoring the Life Span of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration".)

Yes | No

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 23

3.3.1.3 Phototrode

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Select any name for the sensor. Arbitrary

Unit The unit of measure for the sensor to be defined. %T | A | mV

Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. AB1/SENSOR1 | AB1/SEN-SOR2 (more depending on equipment)

Serial number You can enter a serial number for the sensor here. Arbitrary

Wavelength The Phototrode DP5 features a selection of 5 fixed wavelengths in [nm].

520 | 555 | 590 | 620 | 660

Zero point The zero point of the phototrode in [%T]. -100 … 100

Slope The slope of the phototrode in [mV/%T]. -100 … 100

Calibration tem-perature

The temperature during calibration in [°C]. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".)

-20 … 200

Calibration method

The phototrode can only be manually calibrated. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

Manual

Date/Time Date and time of the last calibration. (Does not ap-pear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

Date/Time

Performed by The name of the user or LabX user logged in during the last calibration. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

Logged-in user | LabX user

Monitoring expira-tion dates

Specifies whether to monitor the expiration date of the sensor. (See "3.8.1 Monitoring the Expiration Date of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration" only.) (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".)

Yes | No

Monitoring life span

Specifies whether to monitor the life span of the sensor. (See "3.8.2 Monitoring the Life Span of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration".)

Yes | No

3.3.1.4 Polarized Sensors

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Select any name for the sensor. Arbitrary

Unit The unit of measure for the sensor to be defined. mV | µA

Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. AB1/SENSOR2 (more de-pending on equipment)

Serial number You can enter a serial number for the sensor here. Arbitrary

Monitoring life span

Specifies whether to monitor the life span of the sensor. (See "3.8.2 Monitoring the Life Span of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration".)

Yes | No

Setup

24 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.3.1.5 Temperature Sensors

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Select any name for the sensor. Arbitrary

Unit The unit of measure for the sensor to be defined. °C | °F | K

Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. AB1/PT1000 | (more de-pending on equipment)

Serial number You can enter a serial number for the sensor here. Arbitrary

Zero point The zero point of the pH sensor in the selected unit. -20 … 200 [°C]-4.0 … 392 [°F]253.2 … 473.2 [K]

Calibration method

The titrator fills this field in automatically. The entry is either filled in as "Manual" if the calibration was conducted manually, or it is filled in with the name of the calibration method if the sensor was calibrat-ed with the aid of the "Calibrate" method function.(Info field)

Manual | Name of the calibration method

Date/Time Date and time of the last calibration. (Info field) Date/Time

Performed by The name of the user or LabX user logged in during the last calibration. (Info field)

Logged-in user | LabX user

Monitoring expira-tion dates

Specifies whether to monitor the expiration date of the sensor. (See "3.8.1 Monitoring the Expiration Date of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titra-tion" only.)

Yes | No

Monitoring life span

Specifies whether to monitor the life span of the sensor. (See "3.8.2 Monitoring the Life Span of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration".)

Yes | No

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 25

3.3.1.6 Conductivity Sensors

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Select any name for the sensor. Arbitrary

Unit The unit of measure for the sensor to be defined. µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS

Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. CB1/Conductivity (more depending on equipment)

Serial number You can enter a serial number for the sensor here. Arbitrary

Internal tempera-ture sensor

If the sensor has an internal temperature sensor, you can select "yes" here. In this case the system will automatically make an entry in the sensor setup for the internal temperature sensor.

Yes | No

T compensation For the temperature compensation, the titrator converts the conductivity to a defined reference temperature. Linear: The conductivity is linearly converted to a reference temperature. The linearity is described by the temperature coefficient [%/°C]. Non-linear: The conductivity is converted to a refer-ence temperature non-linearly, in accordance with the EN norm 27 888.No: The conductivity is determined without tem-perature compensation.(Appears for "unit" = "µS/cm" or "mS/cm" only.)

Linear | Non-linear | No

Temperature coef-ficient

The temperature coefficient in [%/°C] defines the percentage of the change in conductivity for linear temperature compensation for a temperature increase of 1 °C.(Appears for "T compensation" = "linear" only.)

0.001 … 100

Reference tem-perature

The reference temperature in [°C] for the tempera-ture compensation. (Appears for "T compensation" = "linear" or "non-linear" only.)

25.0 | 20.0

Cell constant The cell constant in [1/cm] can be entered here. The cell constant is required to convert the measured sensor conductivity [mS | µS] into the conductivity [mS/cm | µS/cm]. The temperature compensation only affects the conductivity, not the conductance.(Appears for "unit" = "µS/cm" or "mS/cm" only.)

0 … 100

Calibration tem-perature

You can enter the calibration temperature here. This is required during calibration to determine the temperature-dependent conductivity from conduc-tivity standards. (Appears for "unit" = "µS/cm" or "mS/cm" only.)

-20 … 200

Calibration method

The titrator fills this field in automatically. The entry is either filled in as "Manual" if the calibration was conducted manually, or it is filled in with the name of the calibration method if the sensor was calibrat-ed with the aid of the "Calibrate" method function.(Appears for "unit" = "µS/cm" or "mS/cm" only.) (Info field)

Manual | Name of the calibration method

Date/Time Date and time of the last calibration. (Appears for "unit" = "µS/cm" or "mS/cm" only.) (Info field)

Date/Time

Setup

26 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Performed by The name of the user or LabX user logged in during the last calibration. (Appears for "unit" = "µS/cm" or "mS/cm" only.) (Info field)

Logged-in user | LabX user

Monitoring expira-tion dates

Specifies whether to monitor the expiration date of the sensor. (See "3.8.1 Monitoring the Expira-tion Date of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration" only.) (Appears for "unit" = "µS/cm" or "mS/cm" only.)

Yes | No

Monitoring life span

Specifies whether to monitor the life span of the sensor. (See "3.8.2 Monitoring the Life Span of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration".)

Yes | No

• Temperature compensation is only conducted for the following units of measure: µS/cm and mS/cm (conductivity). Temperature compensation is not conducted for units of measure µS and mS (conductance).

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 27

3.3.1.7 Ion-selective Sensors (ISE Sensors)

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Select any name for the sensor. Arbitrary

Ion charge The ion charge of the ion to be determined with the ISE sensor.

-3 | -2 | -1 | +1 | +2 | +3

Unit The unit of measure for the sensor to be defined. pM | pX | ppm | mV

Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. AB1/SENSOR1 | AB1/SENSOR2 (more depending on equip-ment)

Serial number You can enter a serial number for the sensor here. Arbitrary

Calibration Defines the calibration type. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".)

Segmented | Linear

Cal

ibra

tion

type

"se

gmen

ted"

Number of seg-ments

This parameter is adjusted automatically by the cal-ibration method used. All subsequent parameters will be adjusted to match the number of segments. The system records two numbers per segment (zero point and slope). x-1 segment boundaries are entered for x segments. The maximum possible calibration is for 9 points (resulting in 8 segments). (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

3 … 9

Zero point 1 The zero point of the sensor in the selected unit for the first segment. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Slope 1 (TCalib) The sensor gradient in [mV/Unit] for the 1st seg-ment at calibration temperature. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Slope 1 (25 °C) The ISE-sensor gradient in [mV/Unit] for the 1st Seg-ment, umgerechnet auf eine Temperatur von 25 °C. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Seg. limit 1, 2 Specifies the boundary between Segments 1 and 2 in the selected unit. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Zero point 2 The zero point of the sensor in the selected unit for the second segment. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Slope 2 (TCalib) The sensor gradient in [mV/Unit] for the 2nd seg-ment at calibration temperature. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Slope 2 (25 °C) The gradient of the ISE sensor for the 2nd seg-ment in [mV/Unit], recalculated for a temperature of 25 °C (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

-100 … 100

… etc.

Setup

28 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Cal

ibra

tion

type

"Li

near

"

Zero point The zero point of the ISE sensor in the selected unit. (Zero point, slope and corresponding calibration temperature are required to convert the mV signal of the sensor to the "pH" unit.)(Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".)

-100 … 100

Slope (TCalib) The slope of the sensor at the calibration tempera-ture in [mV/unit]. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".)

-100 … 100

Slope (25.0 °C) The slope of the ISE sensor in [mV/unit], based on a temperature of 25 °C. This field will update auto-matically every time the parameters "Slope [mV/pH]" or "Calibration Temperature [°C]" are changed. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

-100 … 100

Calibration temperature The temperature in [°C] during calibration. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field for linear calibration)

-20 … 200

Calibration method The titrator fills this field in automatically. The entry is either filled in as "Manual" if the calibration was conducted manually, or it is filled in with the name of the calibration method if the sensor was calibrat-ed with the aid of the "Calibrate" method function.(Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

Manual | Name of the calibration method

Date/Time Date and time of the last calibration. (Does not ap-pear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

Date/Time

Performed by The name of the user or LabX user logged in during the last calibration. (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".) (Info field)

Logged-in user | LabX user

Monitoring expiration dates

Specifies whether to monitor the expiration date of the sensor. (See "3.8.1 Monitoring the Expiration Date of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration" only.) (Does not appear for "unit" = "mV".)

Yes | No

Monitoring life span Specifies whether to monitor the life span of the sensor. (See "3.8.2 Monitoring the Life Span of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration".)

Yes | No

• There are two separate calibration settings for ISE sensors: one for the units of measure pM and pX, and one for the unit of measure ppm.

• When calibrating an ISE sensor in ppm units, the sensor's slope and zero point are specified in pX or pM units.

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 29

3.3.2 Pumps

In this menu, you can configure a maximum of 20 pumps for use with the titrator.Starting from the pump list, you can add new pumps or select existing ones and change their settings. The list can also be printed and pumps can be deleted.

Both peristaltic and membrane pumps can be installed. For each pump, you need to specify an explicit, user-defined name, the pumping rate and the connection from which the pump should operate.The following settings are available:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Type The type of pump (membrane or peristaltic pump). Membrane | Peristaltic

Name The name of the pump. Arbitrary

Rate Defines the pumping rate in [mL/min] for the pump. 0.1 … 1000

Pump output The output where you want to operate the pump. MB/Pump1 | MB/Pump2 | AB1/Pump(more depending on equip-ment)

• A maximum of 20 pumps can be stored in the titrator.

3.3.3 Peripherals

In this menu you can configure peripheral instruments to be attached to the titrator. The following types of instruments can be configured:

• Balance• Barcode reader• USB stick• Printer• Personal computer (PC settings)• TBox

The entire list of peripheral instruments defined in the titrator as well as the settings for each instrument, can be output to a printer.

Setup

30 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.3.3.1 BalanceThe titrator supports following types of balances:

Balance type Supported balances

Mettler AB | PB | PB-S | AB-S | PB-E | AB-E | College-S | SB | CB | GB | College-B | HBAG | PG | PG-S | SG | HGXP | XSAX | MX | UMXPR | SR | HRAT | MT | UMT | PM | AM | SM | CM

Sartorius Sartorius

Others --

In order to install a balance, the balance type must first be selected:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Balance type Use this parameter to select the type of balance you want to connect.

Mettler | Sartorius | Others | None

The following settings are available for each individual balance type:

METTLER TOLEDO Balances

These balances support Plug'n'Play and are automatically recognized and configured by the titrator.Baud Rate, Data Bit, Stop Bit, Parity and Handshake can be entered manually as long as the balance is not connected to the titrator. However, these will be overwritten automatically with the values identified by the PnP as soon as the user has entered the same transmission settings on the balance and the titrator.

The following settings will be available after a METTLER TOLEDO balance has been selected via the set-ting "Balance Type":

Parameter Explanation Value range

Status Use this parameter to define whether the balance is connected to the titrator. As soon as the titra-tor identifies the balance, this setting will change to "installed" and the following settings will be set automatically.(Info field)

Installed | Not installed

Name The name of the balance. (Info field appears only when a balance has been identified)

See table of supported bal-ances above.

Serial number The serial number of the balance. (Info field ap-pears only when a balance has been identified)

Arbitrary

Software version The version of the balance software. (Info field ap-pears only when a balance has been identified)

Arbitrary

Max. weight The maximum weight that can be weighed. (Info field appears only when a balance has been identi-fied)

depends on balance type

Resolution The resolution of the balance. (Info field appears only when a balance has been identified)

depends on balance type

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 31

Socket The serial port to which the balance is connected. The possible connections are located on the mainboard, the analog board and the conductivity board. (Info field)

MB/COM1 | MB/COM2 | AB1/COM (more depending on equipment)

Baud rate The baud rate for the transmission of the data from the balance. (A baud rate of 19200 can only be se-lected for the serial connections on the mainboard.) (Info field)

1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200

Data bit Defines the number of data bits. (Info field) 7 | 8

Stop bit Defines the number of stop bits. (2 stop bits can only be selected if you simultaneously select 7 data bits.) (Info field)

1 | 2

Parity Defines the parity protocol. (Info field) Even | Odd | None

Handshake Defines which handshake procedure to use for the data transmission between balance and titrator. (Only the "Xon-Xoff" handshake procedure is avail-able for the serial ports on the analog board and conductivity board with a baud rate of 9600.) (Info field)

None | Hardware | Xon-Xoff

• In order to enable the system to automatically recognize the balance, you must ensure that1. the balance is started and is connected to the titrator via a compatible cable,2. the balance has been set to "Bidirectional" (if necessary, adjust setting to "Host", accordingly),3. the settings for the RS-232 interface on the balance correspond with those on the titrator.

Sartorius | Others

The following settings will be available after a Sartorious or other balance has been selected via the setting "Balance Type":

Parameter Explanation Value range

Status Use this parameter to define whether the balance is connected to the titrator. Since these balances cannot be identified automatically, this setting will automatically change to "installed". (Info field)

Installed

Name The name of the balance. Arbitrary

Serial number The serial number of the balance. Arbitrary

Socket The serial port to which the balance is connected. The possible connections are located on the mainboard, the analog board and the conductivity board.

MB/COM1 | MB/COM2 | AB1/COM (more depending on equipment)

Baud rate The baud rate for the transmission of the data from the balance. (A baud rate of 19200 can only be se-lected for the serial connections on the mainboard.)

1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200

Data bit Defines the number of data bits. 7 | 8

Stop bit Defines the number of stop bits. (2 stop bits can only be selected if you simultaneously select 7 data bits.)

1 | 2

Parity Defines the parity protocol. Even | Odd | None

Setup

32 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Handshake Defines which handshake procedure to use for the data transmission between balance and titrator. (Only the "Xon-Xoff" handshake procedure is avail-able for the serial ports on the analog board and conductivity board with a baud rate of 9600.)

None | Hardware | Xon-Xoff

• The settings for baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity and handshake for the balance and the titrator must correspond with one another.

No balance available

A balance should not be attached to the titrator if selecting "none" for the balance type.

3.3.3.2 Barcode ReaderThe following settings are available for a barcode reader:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Status Use this parameter to define whether the barcode reader is connected to the titrator. (Info field)

Installed | Not installed

Name The name of the barcode reader. Arbitrary

Serial number The serial number of the barcode reader. Arbitrary

Socket The USB port to which the barcode reader is con-nected. "PnP" if the barcode reader is not con-nected to the titrator.) (Info field)

MB/USB1 | PnP

• The USB2 connection on the mainboard is strictly reserved for LabX.• Only one barcode reader can be defined.

3.3.3.3 USB StickThe titrator supports commercially available USB sticks starting with USB Version 1.1.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Status Use this parameter to define whether the USB stick is connected to the titrator. (Info field)

Installed | Not installed

Name The name of the USB stick.(Info field)

Arbitrary

Free memory The amount of memory still free on the USB stick.(Info field) (Appears only when the USB stick is installed)

Arbitrary

Socket The USB port to which the USB stick is connected. ("PnP" if the USB stick is not connected to the titra-tor.)(Info field)

MB/USB1 | PnP

• The USB2 connection on the mainboard is strictly reserved for LabX.

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 33

3.3.3.4 PrinterThe titrator supports USB printers with PCL protocol, starting with Version 4.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Status Use this parameter to define whether the printer is connected to the titrator. (Info field)

Installed | Not installed

Name The name of the printer. Arbitrary

Serial number The printer's serial number. Arbitrary

Socket The USB port to which the printer is connected. ("PnP" if the printer is not connected to the titrator.)(Info field)

MB/USB1 | PnP

• The USB2 connection on the mainboard is strictly reserved for LabX.

5.3.3.5 PC SettingsYou can operate your titrator using only the terminal ("operation mode" = "stand-alone") or only a personal computer ("operation mode" = "remote"). However, it is also possible to attach both a personal computer and the terminal ("operation mode" = "dual") to the titrator. In this menu, you can select the operation mode for your titrator as well as the communication settings for a PC in the event you want to attach one.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Operation mode Specifies whether the titrator is only connected to the terminal ("stand-alone"), or to a terminal and a PC ("dual").

Stand alone | Dual

Connection type Defines how the PC is connected to the titrator - either via the network connection or via the USB port.(Appears for "operation mode" = "dual" only.)

Network | USB

Status Indicates whether or not a PC is connected to the titrator and whether there is a connection fault.(Appears for "operation mode" = "dual" only.) (Info field)

Connected | Not con-nected | Error

Port number Defines the port for a network connection between the titrator and a PC.(Appears for "operation mode" = "dual" and "con-nection type" = "network" only.)

1024 … 65535

Obtain IP address automatically

Indicates whether the IP address should be auto-matically obtained over the network. (Appears for "operation mode" = "dual" and "con-nection type" = "network" only.)

Yes | No

IP address If you do not want the IP address to be obtained automatically, you can enter it here.(Appears for "operation mode" = "dual", "con-nection type" = "network" and "obtain IP address automatically" = "no" only.)

000.000.000.000 … 255.255.255.255

IP address The automatically referenced IP address. (Info field)(Appears for "operation mode" = "dual", "con-nection type" = "network" and "obtain IP address automatically" = "yes" only.)

000.000.000.000 … 255.255.255.255

Setup

34 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Subnet mask If you want to run the titrator on a local subnetwork, you can define the subnet mask here that you want to use to link the subnet's IP address.(Appears for "operation mode" = "dual", "con-nection type" = "network" and "obtain IP address automatically" = "no" only.)

000.000.000.000 … 255.255.255.255

Standard gateway This is where you can enter the address of the standard gateway for communication between the various networks.(Appears for "operation mode" = "dual", "con-nection type" = "network" and "obtain IP address automatically" = "no" only.)

000.000.000.000 … 255.255.255.255

• The PC with LabX must always be connected to the USB2 or ethernet connection on the mainboard. • After the PC settings have been modified, it may be necessary to reboot the titrator.

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 35

3.3.3.6 TBoxThe following settings are available for the METTLER TOLEDO TBox:

Parameter Explanation Value range

TBox connected Use this parameter to define whether the TBox is connected to the titrator.

Yes | No

• When the TBox is installed on the titrator, the TTL outputs on the titrator will become available in the pump setup.

3.3.4 Titration Stands

You can configure the titration stands attached to the titrator here.The following types of titration stands can be attached:

• Manual stand• External stand• Auto stand• Rondolino TTL• Rondo60/TowerA and Rondo60/TowerB

Starting from the titration stand list, you can add new titration stands or select existing ones and change their settings. The list can also be printed and individual titration stands can be deleted.

• A maximum of 30 titration stands can be stored in the titrator.

Rondo60 titration stands are entered into the setup automatically via the PnP as soon as the Rondo60 is attached to the titrator.

• Rondo60 titration stands (TowerA and TowerB) that were automatically identified and configured using the PnP can also be set up manually without being attached to the titrator in order to edit methods. In doing so, the "Connection" setting will automatically come up as "PnP" and all info fields will contain the default values. These settings can only be modified by attaching an appropri-ate Rondo60 to the titrator.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Type Type of titration stand. Manual stand | Exter-nal stand | Auto stand | Rondolino TTL | Rondo60/TowerA | Rondo60/TowerB

The following settings are available for the configuration of various types of titration stands:

Setup

36 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.3.4.1 Manual StandAfter you have selected "Manual stand" for the "type" setting, the following settings will be available:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name The name of the titration stand. You can select one of two names.

Manual stand 1 | Manual stand 2

Stirrer output Defines the stirrer output. MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER | Internal stirrer(more depending on equip-ment)

3.3.4.2 External StandAfter you have selected "External stand" for the "type" setting, the following settings will be available:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name The name of the titration stand. You can select one of two names.

External stand 1 | External stand 2

Stirrer output Defines the stirrer output. MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER | Internal stirrer(more depending on equip-ment)

3.3.4.3 Auto StandAfter you have selected "Auto stand" for the "type" setting, the following settings will be available:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name The name of the titration stand. You can select one of two names.

Auto stand 1 | Auto stand 2

Stirrer output Defines the stirrer output. MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER | Internal stirrer(more depending on equip-ment)

• When using an auto stand, the notification window that prompts the user to add the respective sample does not appear. In this case, using a sample changer can ensure an uninterrupted analy-sis procedure when conducting a multiple determination.

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 37

3.3.4.4 RondolinoTTLAfter you have selected "Rondolino TTL" for the "type" setting, the following settings will be available:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name The name of the titration stand. You can select one of two names.

Rondolino TTL 1 | Rondolino TTL 2

Stirrer output Defines the stirrer output. MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER (more depending on equipment)

Socket Indicates that the Rondolino TTL is attached to the TTL connection on the mainboard. (Info field)

MB/TTL

• The Rondolino is attached to the TTL connection on the mainboard.

3.3.4.5 Rondo60After you have selected "Rondo60/Tower A" or "Rondo60/Tower B" for the "type" setting, the following settings will be available:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name The name of the titration stand. You can select one of two names.

Rondo60/1A | Rondo60/1B | Rondo60/2A | Rondo60/2B

Stirrer output Defines the stirrer output. MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER | Rondo60/1A stirrer | Rondo60/1B stirrer | Rondo60/2A stirrer | Rondo60/2B stirrer | (more depending on equipment)

Socket Establishes that the Rondo60 is connected to the titrator. (Rondo60/1 to COM1, Rondo60/2 to COM2)(PnP for a manual definition for use in method creation.) (Info field)

PnP | MB/COM1 | MB/COM2

Rack Indicates the size of the rack. (Info field) 20 | 12 | 15 | 60

Beaker height Defines the height of the sample beaker used in [mm]. (Info field)

90 | 110 | 150 | 210

Tower position Indicates whether the tower is located on the right or on the left. (Info field)

left | right

Conditioning beaker

Indicates whether a conditioning beaker is used. (Info field)

Yes | No

Rinse beaker Indicates whether a rinse beaker is used. (Info field) Yes | No

Special beaker 1 Indicates whether a special beaker 1 is used. (Info field)

Yes | No

Special beaker 2 Indicates whether a special beaker 2 is used. (Info field)

Yes | No

Setup

38 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

CoverUp Defines whether a CoverUp unit is connected to the Rondo and, if so, to which port. Select "none" if there is no CoverUp unit on your Rondo.(Appears only if "rack" = "20" is selected.)

Rondo60/1 TTL-Out 1 | Rondo60/1 TTL-Out 2 | Rondo60/2 TTL-Out 1 | Rondo60/2 TTL-Out 2 | Converter box/TTL-Out1 | Converter box/TTL-Out2 | MB/TTL-Out1 | MB/TTL-Out2 | None

3.3.5 Auxiliary Instruments

Auxiliary instruments can be any instruments that access a titrator's TTL, 24 V output, stirrer or RS232 connection and that are to be used in a method (e.g. valves, dispensers, etc.).An auxiliary instrument is switched on for a specific period of time, or is switched on and then switched off again using a corresponding command. The instruments are controlled using the method function "Auxiliary instrument".Auxiliary instruments are part of a method, whereas peripheral instruments are classified as input/output instruments (printers, balance, barcode readers, etc.), which do not have direct access to methods.Starting from the auxiliary instruments list, you can add new auxiliary instruments or select existing ones and change their settings. The list can also be printed and auxiliary instruments can be deleted.

• A maximum of 50 auxiliary instruments can be stored in the titrator.

In order to add a new auxiliary instrument, you must first select the manner in which the auxiliary instru-ment should be controlled using the "Control type" setting:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Control type The manner in which the auxiliary instrument is to be controlled.

24 V output | TTL out (single pin) | TTL input (single pin) | TTL (multi pin) | stirrer | RS-232

The following settings are available for the various auxiliary instrument control methods:

24 V output

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Enter any name for the auxiliary instrument. Arbitrary

Output Indicates which port on the titrator you want to use for the auxiliary instrument.

MB/PUMP1 | MB/PUMP2 | AB1/PUMP (more depend-ing on equipment)

TTL out (single pin)

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Enter any name for the auxiliary instrument. Arbitrary

Output Indicates which port and which pin on the titrator you want to use for the auxiliary instrument.

MB/TTL-Out 1 | MB/TTL-Out 2 | MB/TTL-Out 3 | MB/TTL-Out 4 (more depending on equipment)

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 39

TTL input (single pin)

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Enter any name for the auxiliary instrument. Arbitrary

Input Indicates which port and which pin on the titrator you want to use for the auxiliary instrument.

MB/TTL-In 1 | MB/TTL-In 2 (more depending on equipment)

TTL (multipin)

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Enter any name for the auxiliary instrument. Arbitrary

Output Indicates which port on the titrator you want to use for the auxiliary instrument.

MB/TTL (more depending on equipment)

Stirrer (0 – 18 V output)

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Enter any name for the auxiliary instrument. Arbitrary

Output Indicates which port on the titrator you want to use for the auxiliary instrument.

MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER | Inter-nal stirrer (more depending on equipment)

RS-232

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Enter any name for the auxiliary instrument. Arbitrary

Socket The serial port to which the auxiliary instrument is connected. The possible connections are located on the mainboard, the analog board and the conduc-tivity board.

MB/COM1 | MB/COM2 | AB1/COM (more depending on equipment)

Baud rate The baud rate for the data transmission via the RS-232 interface. (A baud rate of 19200 can only be selected for the serial connections on the main-board.)

1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200

Data bit Defines the number of data bits. 7 | 8

Stop bit Defines the number of stop bits. (2 stop bits can only be selected if you simultaneously select 7 data bits.)

1 | 2

Parity Defines the parity protocol. Even | Odd | None

Handshake Defines which handshake procedure to use for the data transmission via the RS-232 interface. (Only the "Xon-Xoff" handshake procedure is available for the serial ports on the analog board and conductiv-ity board with a baud rate of 9600.)

None | Hardware | Xon-Xoff

Setup

40 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.4 User Settings

In the menu "User Settings", you will find setting options for the titrator that can be specifically assigned for each user.This is where you can configure the language (for the terminal and records), display settings (for the touchscreen), the layout of the alphanumeric and numeric keyboard, the use of sounds and the shortcuts for each user.

3.4.1 Language

The language can be specified for operating the terminal as well as for the records to be output to a printer.In both cases the following six languages can be selected:

• German• English• French• Italian• Spanish• Chinese

Parameter Explanation Value range

Touchscreen Defines the language used to operate the terminal. German | English | French | Italian | Spanish | Chinese

Record Defines the language used to output the records to a printer.

German | English | French | Italian | Spanish | Chinese

3.4.2 Display

You can change the appearance of the menus using the settings "Primary Color" and "Button Shape". The brightness of the TFT display can be adjusted according to the available light settings using the setting "Brightness". By using the "Screen Saver" and "Wait Time" settings, you can also determine whether to activate the screen saver and, if so, how much time should lapse before it activates.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Primary color Select from among various color schemes for the user interface.

Gray | Blue | Green | Red

Brightness Defines the brightness of the screen in [%]. 50 | 60 | 70 | 80 | 90 | 100 [%]

Button shape Defines whether to display the buttons in the menus with square or rounded corners.

Rounded | Square

Screen saver Defines whether to use a screen saver. Yes | No

Wait time Defines how long the system should wait after the user's last action on the terminal before activating the screen saver.

1 … 1000 [min]

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 41

3.4.3 Sounds

In this menu you can turn the sound with button touches on or off.

Parameter Explanation Value range

At push of a button

If you select "yes" here, a signal tone will sound each time a button is pressed.

Yes | No

3.4.4 Shortcuts

Here each user has the option to manage the shortcuts they have created.A list of all of the shortcuts for the user currently logged in can be viewed and printed.Individual shortcuts can be created and deleted, and shortcut settings can be changed.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Type Defines whether the shortcut will start a method, a series or a manual operation. (Info field)

Manual operation | Method | Series

Description Any designation you prefer for the shortcut, which will appear in the shortcut symbol.

Arbitrary

Method ID The method ID of the method started by the short-cut.(Appears for "type" = "method" only.) (Info field)

Method list

Series ID The series ID of the series started by the shortcut.(Appears for "type" = "series" only.) (Info field)

Series list

Immediate start Defines whether the shortcut will start the method, series or manual operation immediately or merely switch to its start screen. Shortcuts that start the analysis immediately are identified by a little blue man in the symbol.

Yes | No

Homepage posi-tion

The position of the shortcut on the Home screen. 1 … 12

Created by The name of the user who created the shortcut. Logged-in user

Setup

42 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.4.5 Keyboards

Here you can specify the layout of the alphanumeric and numeric input fields.

Parameter Explanation Value range

ABC keyboard Defines the layout of the alphanumeric input field. English | French | German

123 keyboard Defines the organization of the keys for the numeric input field.

Calculator | Telephone

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 43

3.5 Global Settings

In this menu you can select all of the global settings for the titrator that apply to all users. The settings in this menu can only be changed by a user who has the proper authority. The following fall under the heading Global Settings:

• System settings that apply to all users (time, date, etc.)• User management (creating user accounts and apportioning authority)• The settings that indicate how analyses are managed with regard to procedure and monitoring

the life span and expiration dates of resources (predetermining the way the titrator performs at the beginning, during and after conducting an analysis), and how the titrator deletes resources and recognizes PnP resources.

3.5.1 System

Specific system settings can be selected here:

• Titrator identification (titrator ID, type, serial number and software version.)• Date/Time (date and time format and current date and time.)• Header and footer (configuration of header, footer and the end of reports.)• Data saving (defines whether analysis data should be deleted when system is shut down.)

3.5.1.1 Titrator IdentificationIn this menu you can assign an arbitrary ID to the titrator consisting of a minimum of four characters. You can also view the titrator's serial number, type and software version.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Titrator ID Enter any ID for the titrator. It must contain at least four characters.

Arbitrary

Titrator The type of titrator. (Info field) T50 | T70 | T90

Serial number The serial number of the titrator. (Info field)

Software version The software version of the software installed.(Info field)

Setup

44 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.5.1.2 Date/TimeIn this menu you can indicate the format in which the date and time are displayed and also set the date and time in the titrator.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Date format You can select the format from a list of 12 date formats.

12 different formats

Time format You can choose between the 12-hour display fol-lowed by am or pm and the 24-hour display.

am/pm | 24-hr

Date Here you can enter the current date in the selected format.

According to the selected format

Time Here you can enter the current time in the selected format.

According to the selected format

3.5.1.3 Header and FooterIn this menu you can select whether all printouts generated by the titrator should have headers and footers. You can enter the content of the headers and footers directly into the corresponding "text" setting.You can also specify whether an "End of Report" text should be added to results, methods and serial templates, and what information this text should contain.Signature fields consisting of a declaration (e.g. "Approved by") followed by a blank line will be inserted into the printouts containing an End of Report notification. A signature can be added to this line at a later time.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Header Indicates whether each printout will contain a header.

Yes | No

Text Contains the text for a header.(Appears only if "header" = "yes" is selected.)

Arbitrary

Footer Indicates whether each printout will contain a footer. Yes | No

Text Contains the text for a footer.(Appears only if "footer" = "yes" is selected.)

Arbitrary

End of Report notification

Defines whether each printout of results, methods and serial templates should contain an End of Report notification.

Yes | No

Created by Can be selected as a signature field for the End of Report notification.(Appears only if "End of Report" = "yes" is se-lected.)

Yes | No

Modified by Can be selected as a signature field for the End of Report notification.(Appears only if "End of Report" = "yes" is se-lected.)

Yes | No

Checked by Can be selected as a signature field for the End of Report notification.(Appears only if "End of Report" = "yes" is se-lected.)

Yes | No

Approved by Can be selected as a signature field for the End of Report notification.(Appears only if "End of Report" = "yes" is se-lected.)

Yes | No

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 45

3.5.1.4 Data StorageHere you can define whether or not all analysis data is to be deleted from the titrator memory when the titrator is shut down.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Delete data when instrument is shut down

If you select "yes" then all analysis data will be deleted when the titrator is shut down.

Yes | No

3.5.2 User Management

You can manage titrator users and user groups in this menu.A maximum of 30 different users can be defined for the titrator, however only one user can be signed in to the instrument at a time (single user mode).Each user can belong to one or more user groups. Authority can be assigned to each group specifically. Only the predefined group of administrators has full authority all of the time and cannot be deleted.

3.5.2.1 UserIn this menu, you can assign a user account for up to 30 different users.User accounts can be deleted, modified or printed.The following settings are available for each user account:

Parameter Explanation Value range

User Name The user's login ID. Arbitrary

Full name The user's full name. Arbitrary

User group 1 The first user group to which the user is assigned. List of user groups

Member of user group 2 … 10

Indicates whether the user belongs to additional user groups (2 to a maximum of 10). Always appears paired with the parameter "User group 2 … 10".

Yes | No

User group 2 … 10

Always appears paired with the "Member of user group 2 … 10" parameter and only when "yes" was selected for that parameter.

List of user groups

Description Any description for the user account or for the user. Arbitrary

Reset password If you select "yes" here, the user's password will be reset to "123456" and the user will be required to change their password the next time they log in. Only appears if "yes" was selected for the account setting "Enforce password".

Yes | No

Lock user If you select "yes" here, the user's account will be blocked. Only appears if "yes" was selected for the account setting "Enforce password".

Yes | No

Enforce password change

If you select "yes" here, the user will be required to change their password the next time they log onto the titrator. Only appears if "yes" was selected for the account setting "Enforce password".

Yes | No

Created by The name of the administrator who created the user account. (Info field)

User name (user with ad-ministrative authorities)

Created on Date and time the user account was created.(Info field)

Date/Time

Modified by The name of the administrator who last changed this user account. (Info field)

User name (user with ad-ministrative authorities)

Setup

46 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Modified on Date and time of the last change to this user ac-count.(Info field)

Date/Time

• A user with administrative authorities is already stored in the instrument prior to being shipped. The default password for this user is "123456" (enter without quotation marks).

3.5.2.2 GroupsIn this menu you can define and manage up to 10 different user groups.User groups can be assigned varying levels of authority. A user is always assigned to at least one user group. All user groups, up to the administrators' user group that possesses full authority, can be deleted.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Group name Enter any name for the user group. Arbitrary

Description Enter any description for the user group. Arbitrary

Editing methods If a user group has this authorization, a member of this group will be able to create methods in the method editor and have full editing privileges for them.

Yes | No

Editing series and samples

If a user group has this authorization, a member of this group will be able to create serial templates and samples and have full editing privileges for them.

Yes | No

Editing resources and peripherals

If a user group has this authorization, a member of this group will be able to create resource and peripheral devices and have full editing privileges for them.

Yes | No

Global and analy-sis sequence settings

If a user group has this authorization, a member of this group will be able to edit the global settings in the setup.

Yes | No

Editing user spe-cific settings

If a user group has this authorization, a member of this group will be able to edit the user-specific set-tings in the setup.

Yes | No

Editing results If a user group has this authorization, a member of this group will be able to edit the saved results.

Yes | No

Starting methods and series

If a user group has this authorization, a member of this group will be able to start methods from the method list or from the analysis start screen.

Yes | No

Executing manual operations

If a user group has this authorization, a member of this group will be able to run manual-mode opera-tion.

Yes | No

Created by The name of the administrator who created the user account. (Info field)

User name (user with ad-ministrative authorities)

Created on Date and time the user account was created. (Info field)

Date/Time

Modified by The name of the administrator who last changed this user account. (Info field)

User name (user with ad-ministrative authorities)

Modified on Date and time of the last change to this user ac-count. (Info field)

Date/Time

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 47

3.5.2.3 Account GuidelinesYou can define how the titrator performs at startup in the account guidelines. 2 settings are available:

• Enforce password• Min. number of characters

• If "yes" was selected for the "enforce password" setting, then • the login screen will always appear at startup (even when only one user is defined in the titra-

tor).• the user name must always be typed into the login screen manually (this entry field is always

blank at first).

• If you select "enforce password" = "yes" on an instrument still programmed with the factory set-tings, the titrator will require a password for the defined user at the next system startup. This default password is "123456" (enter without quotation marks).

If "no" was selected for the "enforce password" setting, then • the titrator will start up immediately without the login screen, provided only one user is defined in

the instrument (corresponds with the titrator's factory settings).• the user name can be selected from a list in the login screen.

The setting "Min. number of characters" defines the minimum number of characters for a user password. If this setting is changed, then users whose passwords do not comply with the new settings will be required to change their password accordingly the next time they log in.

Setup

48 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Parameter Explanation Value range

Enforce password If "no" is selected here, the titrator will start without the login screen if only one user is defined in the device.

Yes | No

Min. number of characters

Defines the minimum number of characters for a user password.(Appears only if "enforce password" = "yes" is selected.)

1 … 20

3.5.3 Performance of Analyses and Resources

The settings that can be defined in this menu pertain to the process of analyzing samples or series with the aid of methods. Here you can specify how the titrator performs at the beginning, during and after an analysis. In addition, you can specify how the titrator deletes resources and recognizes PnP resources.

• The settings for analysis procedures can only be changed if the titrator is not performing any tasks.

3.5.3.1 Analysis Procedure Settings

The following settings can be specified that affect the way an analysis is conducted:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Display required resources at start

If this parameter is set to "Yes", when an analysis is started a screen will appear with all the resources required for that analysis and their status (present, not present, blocked or in use). Users who select an entry in that screen will receive additional informa-tion about the resource in question. If this is set to "No", the resources required will still be checked when the analysis is started and an error message will appear if applicable.

Yes | No

Show SOP If an SOP (standard operating procedure) was defined in the method in the "Title" method function, the system will display it before the method starts if "yes" is selected for this parameter.

Yes | No

LabX: Warning if not connected

If "yes" is selected then a warning is issued when the analysis is started if there is no connection to LabX.

Yes | No

Rondo60: Confir-mation after com-plete revolution

This setting affects analyses that are to be con-ducted using the Rondo60 and which require more beakers than the Rondo60 rack allows for.If "yes" is selected for this setting, then after the Rondo60 makes one complete revolution, and before a position on the rack has been reached that has already been titrated, a warning message will be displayed that the user has to acknowledge.

Yes | No

Display results after analysis

If "yes" is selected for this setting, then when using a manual titration stand the results of a sample that has been analyzed will be displayed automatically and has to be acknowledged by the user in order to continue the analysis.When using an automatic titration stand this setting will be ignored and the results will be displayed for a certain period, but do not have to be confirmed.

Yes | No

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 49

• If the settings "Display required resources at startup" and "Display SOP" were set to "Yes", then when starting a job series, all of the SOPs and then all of the resources for the individual sample series must first be acknowledged before the job series begins. By doing this, a job series can be carried out without further terminations after being started.

3.5.3.2 Performance of ResourcesIn this menu, you can configure how the titrator deletes resources and automatically recognizes PnP resources.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Information when deleting resources

If you select "yes" for this parameter, the system will execute a safety query before each deletion of a resource.

Yes | No

Information when recognizing PnP resources

If you select "yes" for this resource, the system will output a message each time it identifies a PnP resource.

Yes | No

3.5.3.3 Action when Expiration Date ExceededIf the titrator indicates that the expiration date of a resource has been violated, the titrator can take a number of actions.The following actions are available:

• None If "none" is selected, the analysis will start without a notification despite the expiration date viola-

tion. However, the violation will be recorded.• Warn If "Warn" is selected, the user will be advised of the expiration date violation via a notification and

the raw results and results that were determined using the resources in question will be labeled ac-cordingly.

• Block If "Block" is selected, the user will be advised of the resource's expiration date violation and the

analysis with the affected resource will be blocked. (However, methods used to renew this resource can be started.)

Setup

50 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Parameter Explanation Value range

For sensors If upon starting an analysis the system determines that the expiration date for a sensor used for the analysis has expired, the titrator can execute a variety of actions.You can use this parameter to define which action the titrator should take.

None | Warn | Block

For titrants If upon starting an analysis the system determines that the expiration date for a titrant used for the analysis has expired, the titrator can execute a variety of actions.You can use this parameter to define which action the titrator should take.

None | Warn | Block

For titer standards If upon starting an analysis the system determines that the expiration date for a titer standard used for the analysis has expired, the titrator can execute a variety of actions.You can use this parameter to define which action the titrator should take.

None | Warn | Block

For auxiliary values

If upon starting an analysis the system determines that the expiration date for an auxiliary value used for the analysis has expired, the titrator can execute a variety of actions.You can use this parameter to define which action the titrator should take.

None | Warn | Block

For blanks If upon starting an analysis the system determines that the expiration date for a blank used for the analysis has expired, the titrator can execute a variety of actions.You can use this parameter to define which action the titrator should take.

None | Warn | Block

3.5.3.4 Action when Life Span ExceededIf upon starting an analysis the system determines that the life span of a resource used for the analysis has expired, the titrator can execute a variety of actions.The following actions are available:

• None If "none" is selected, the analysis will start without a notification despite the life span violation.• Warn If "Warn" is selected, the user will be advised of the life span violation via a notification and the raw

results and results that were determined using the resources in question will be labeled accord-ingly.

• Block If "Block" is selected, the user will be advised of the resource's life span violation and the analysis

with the affected resource will be blocked.

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 51

Parameter Explanation Value range

For sensors If upon starting an analysis the system determines that the life span of a sensor used for the analysis has expired, the titrator can execute a variety of actions.You can use this parameter to define which action the titrator should take.

None | Warn | Block

For titrants If upon starting an analysis the system determines that the life span for a titrant used for the analysis has expired, the titrator can execute a variety of actions.You can use this parameter to define which action the titrator should take.

None | Warn | Block

3.5.3.5 Pump and Stirrer Identification

This is where the automatic pump and stirrer identification can be switched on and off.This may be necessary if additional instruments that cannot be automatically identified by the titrator are to be connected to the pump and stirrer outputs.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Pump and stirrer identification

This is where the automatic pump and stirrer identi-fication can be switched on and off.

Yes | No

Setup

52 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.6 Values

Management of the auxiliary values and blanks defined in the titrator are outlined in the menu section entitled "Values". Blanks and auxiliary values can be created, changed and deleted, and the list of defined blank or auxiliary values can be viewed and printed. You can also print out individual values with their parameters.

3.6.1 Blanks

Blanks can be used in calculations within formulas. They can be created in this menu manually using the various parameters, or they can be obtained as the result of a method. The resulting blank (or calculated mean value) can then be assigned to a blank using the method function "Blank". The blank will then appear under the assigned name in the Blank list in Setup.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Enter any name for the blank. Arbitrary

Unit The unit in which the blank is entered. Arbitrary

Value The numeric value of the blank. -100000000 … 100000000

Determination method

The determination method used to create the blank. If the blank was defined manually in the setup, "Manual" will appear here. If it was determined by a method and assigned with the "Blank" method function, the Method ID of the creation method will appear here. (Info field)

Manual | Method ID

Date/Time Date and time of the creation or last update of the blank. (Info field)

Date/Time

Performed by Name of the user or LabX user logged in during the creation or last update. (Info field)

Logged-in user | LabX user

Monitoring expi-ration dates

Defines whether to monitor the expiration date dur-ing which the blank is used. (See "3.8.1 Monitoring the Expiration Date of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration" only.)

Yes | No

• A maximum of 100 blanks can be stored in the titrator. • The "Monitoring Expiration Dates" setting can be switched on for blanks. (See "3.8.1 Monitoring the

Expiration Date of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration" only.)• Blanks cannot be deleted or modified if currently being used.• When assigning a blank using the "Blank" method function, the Setup will be updated immediately

after executing the method function.

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 53

3.6.2 Auxiliary Values

Auxiliary values can be used in formulas. They can be created and edited manually in the "Auxiliary Values" menu or they can be generated by using a method. Using the "Auxiliary Values" method function, a result (a mean value calculated from several results) or a raw result can be assigned to an auxiliary value. The auxiliary value will then appear under the assigned name in the auxiliary values list in Setup.The following parameters can be defined for an auxiliary value:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Name Enter any name for the auxiliary value. Arbitrary

Comments You can enter brief comments here for the auxiliary value.

Arbitrary

Value The numeric value of the auxiliary value. -100000000 … 100000000

Determination method

The determination method used to create the auxiliary value. If the auxiliary value was defined manually in the setup, "Manual" will appear here. If it was defined by a method and assigned with the "Auxiliary value" method function, the Method ID of the creation method will appear here. (Info field)

Manual | Method ID

Date/Time Date and time of the creation or last update of the auxiliary value. (Info field)

Date/Time

Performed by Name of the user or LabX user logged in during the creation or last update. (Info field)

Logged-in user | LabX user

Monitoring expira-tion dates

Defines whether to monitor the expiration date dur-ing which the auxiliary value is used. (See "3.8.1 Monitoring the Expiration Date of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration" only.)

Yes | No

• A maximum of 100 auxiliary values can be stored in the titrator.• The "Monitoring Expiration Dates" setting can be switched on for auxiliary values. (See "3.8.1 Moni-

toring the Expiration Date of a Resource") (For "type" = "general titration" only.)• Auxiliary values cannot be deleted or modified if currently being used.• When assigning an auxiliary value using the "Auxiliary Value" method function, the Setup will be

updated immediately after executing the method function.

Setup

54 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.7 Service & Maintenance

3.7.1 MT-Service

In this menu you can view and print a list of the last (10 maximum) scheduled maintenances per-formed by METTLER TOLEDO. The date and time of the scheduled maintenance as well as the METTLER TOLEDO service technician's user name is displayed for each scheduled maintenance. The most recently performed scheduled maintenance will always appear at the top of the list. You can change the service life (in days) of the last scheduled maintenance and adjust the titrator so that it sets off a warning at a particular time prior to the lapse of the service life (requires administrator authority).

Parameter Explanation Value range

Initial operation The date the titrator was first operated. (Info field) Date

Last maintenance The date the last scheduled maintenance was con-ducted. (Info field)

Date

Service life Defines the expiration period (in days) of the last scheduled maintenance that was conducted.

0 … 10000

Next maintenance The date of the next scheduled maintenance as calculated by the titrator using the expiration period from the last scheduled service conducted. (Info field)

Date

Reminder Defines whether the titrator should output a warning before the expiration period of the last scheduled maintenance conducted has lapsed.

Yes | No

Days before expi-ration

Displays the number of days before the end of the expiration period when you want the titrator to output a warning.The number entered must be smaller than the num-ber for the service life.(Appears only if "reminder" = "yes" is selected.)

0 … 1000

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 55

3.7.2 Import/Export

With this function, you can save data from the titrator to a USB stick (export) and then reload this data back onto a titrator (import).This allows you to create a backup of most of the data that has been changed from the titrator's default settings.

The data in the titrator will be overwritten with the backup data when it is uploaded again. This allows you to have a second titrator with the exact same settings as the first instrument, and allows you to restore titrator settings after repair.

The following two rules have to be observed:

• Only the same or earlier types of backup copies can be imported.• Only the same or earlier versions of software can be imported.

You can select whether you want to import or export a backup of an individual method or the user man-agement settings.

A Backup includes, e.g.:

• all methods• all series• the setup, including all resources • all shortcuts

Not included in a backup are all of the saved results, work orders, data stored on a PnP component and default settings for manual operations.

Administrator authority is required to create and import backup copies.

When importing/exporting an individual method, you can select which method to import or export. To do so, you require the authority to edit methods.

When importing/exporting user management settings all of the settings, including all users and their indi-vidual profiles will be imported or exported, respectively. These actions require administrator authority.

Parameter Explanation Value range

Action Here you can select whether you want to export data from the titrator to a memory stick or would like to import data from a memory stick into the titrator.

Import | Export

Data In this field, you can select data that you would like to import or export. You can import or export the user management settings, an individual method or a complete copy of the memory.

Backup copy | Individual method | User manage-ment

Method ID Here you can select the method ID of the method that you would like to import or export. (Appears for "Data" = "Individual Method" only)

Method list

Setup

56 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.7.3 Resetting Factory Settings

This function allows you to reestablish the factory settings on your titrator. You must have administrator authority in order to use this function.

• In doing so, all data settings and changes to settings made by titrator users will be lost.

3.7.4 Software History

In this menu you can display a list of the last ten software updates or model upgrades (T70 only). The first entry in the list represents the first time the titrator was operated.All stored list entries include date, model (after upgrade), software version (after update) and user name of the user who performed the operation.

3.7.5 Firmware

This menu offers a list of all boards and burette drives available on the titrator, together with the respec-tive firmware version.

3.7.6 Terminal

Under the menu item "Terminal" you can view the chip ID of the chip in the terminal.

3.7.7 Board Data

In this menu you can view and print a list of the boards available on the titrator. Each board is listed by name and module location.

If a board is selected from the list, then its chip ID and all data on available inputs and outputs including the adjustment data will be displayed.

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 57

3.7.8 Drives

In this menu you can view and print a list of the drives connected to the titrator. This list contains the position, serial number and status of each drive.

You can display the following settings for each drive by selecting it from the list:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Position The position of the drive on the titrator. (Info field) 1 … 8

Chip ID The chip ID of the chip in the drive. (Info field) Arbitrary

3.7.9 Burettes

Here you can view and print a list of the PnP burettes connected to the titrator. For each PnP burette, the list displays the chip ID, serial number, volume and position of the drive on which the burette is placed.

3.7.10 Upgrade (only for T70)

With this menu you can upgrade a T70 Titrator to a T90. To do this, you will need a product key that you can obtain from your METTLER TOLEDO Representative. You will need the data displayed in the screen to order the product key:

Parameter Explanation Value range

Upgrade The type of upgrade. The only possible upgrade is from the T70 to the T90. (Info field)

T70->T90

Article number The article number for the upgrade. (Info field) numeric

Upgrade key The upgrade key. (Info field) alphanumeric

You can easily transfer the data from this screen by pressing the "Print" softkey.

If you have received your product key, you can enter it via the "Product Key" softkey and perform an upgrade.

3.7.11 Update

In this menu you can update the titrator software via a USB stick.

Setup

58 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.8 Monitoring the Expiration Date and Life Span of Resources

The titrator can automatically monitor the expiration date and life span of certain resources.

3.8.1 Monitoring the Expiration Date of a Resource

The Expiration date indicates the period after which a specific value for a resource should be determined. These values depend on the type of resource:

• Calibration parameters of a sensor.• The titer of a titrant.• The value of an auxiliary value.• The value of a blank.• The Lot/Batch of a titer standard used.

You can determine whether the titrator should monitor the expiration date in the setup for each re-source. If monitoring is activated, then additional settings are displayed for the corresponding resource with which you can specify the expiration date. You can also choose to have the titrator issue a reminder prior to an expiration date.The additional settings are as follows:

"Monitor expiration date" = "yes"

Parameter Explanation Value range

Time period Defines whether the expiration date will be in a time period of "hours" or "days".

Days | Hours

Expiration date Defines the time period of the expiration date either in days or in hours (depending on the "Time period" parameter).

Days: 1 … 1000Hours: 1 … 10000

Expiry date The expiry date of an expiration date calculated by the titrator in days. (Info field)(Appears for "time range" = "days" only)

Date | Time

Reminder If "yes" is selected here, the system will output a reminder before the expiration of the resource's expiry date. (Appears for "time range" = "days" only)

Yes | No

Days before expi-ration

Defines how many days before the expiration of the expiration date you want the titrator to output a reminder. The number entered here must be earlier than the defined expiration date.(Appears for "time range" = "days" and "reminder" = "yes" only)

0 … 1000 (must be smaller than the value for the expiration date)

Expiry time The expiry time of an expiration date calculated by the titrator in hours. (Info field)(Appears for "time range" = "hours" only)

Date | Time

• If a resource is replenished (e.g. a sensor is recalibrated or the titer of a titrant is redetermined), then the date/time field in the setup for the affected resource will adjust automatically, and the expiration date (or expiry time) will be recalculated.

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 59

Under "Performance of Analyses and Resources" in "Global Settings" you can specify what actions the titrator should take regarding the resource in question at the start of an analysis in the event of an expira-tion date violation. (See "3.5.3.3 Action when Expiration Date Exceeded").

3.8.2 Monitoring the Life Span of a Resource

Life span indicates the period after which a resource has been expended and should be replaced. A life span can be specified for the following resources:

• Sensors• Titrants

When setting up sensors and titrants you can determine whether the titrator should monitor the life span. If monitoring is activated, then additional settings are displayed for the corresponding resource with which you can specify the date the resource was first used as well as a time period for the life span of the resource. The additional settings are as follows:

"Monitor life span" = "yes"

Parameter Explanation Value range

Initial operation Here you can enter the date of the first operation of the resource.

Date

Life span Defines the time period of the resource's life span in months.

0 … 100

Expiry date The resource's expiry date, calculated by the titrator from the numbers entered for the "Initial operation" and "Life span". (Info field)

Date | Time

Under "Performance of Analyses and Resources" in "Global Settings" you can specify what actions the titrator should take regarding the resource in question at the start of an analysis in the event of a life span violation. (See "3.5.3.4 Action when Life Span Exceeded")

Setup

60 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

3.9 Sensor Calibration

Basically, pH sensors, ISE sensors, temperature sensors and conductivity sensors can be calibrated using the titrator. The phototrode has to be calibrated manually. To do so, the correlation between sen-sor signal and transmission capacity has to be determined, and the calculated calibration parameter(s) (usually the slope from a single-point calibration), have to be entered "manually" in the setup menu of the selected phototrode.

To calibrate a sensor using the titrator, you can either start a corresponding calibration method directly, or you can use the "Calibrate" softkey in the sensor's setup menu. If you used the "Calibrate" softkey, an appropriate method will automatically be selected and started for the corresponding sensor.Temperature sensors are calibrated with the temperature standard "freezing water" (0 °C). For conductiv-ity sensors, you can choose the desired standard for the calibration from a standards list. A single-point calibration to determine the cell constant is conducted here.There are essentially two different calibration modes available for calibrating pH and ISE sensors which can be selected in the method function "Sample (Calibrate)":linear calibration and segmented calibration. Both modes are briefly explained below.

3.9.1 Linear Calibration

Linear calibration is illustrated below using examples for a pH sensor.

-300

-200

-100

0

100

200

300

400

500

0 5 10 15

In linear calibration the 1st step is the capture of measurement data and the interpolation of the pH values with the buffer table to the effective values (the values used are only provided as an example):

Buffer solutions selected

Temperature recorded during calibration

Measured values (mV) recorded during calibration

(Actual) pH via interpola-tion in according to pH buffer table

1. Buffer 4.01 (at 25 °C) 17 °C 172 mV 4.00

2. Buffer 7.00 (at 25 °C) 22 °C 0 mV 7.012

3. Buffer 9.21 (at 25 °C) 27 °C -129 mV 9.19

Next, the mV measured values are converted to the averaged temperature TMean

(17 °C + 22 °C + 27 °C)/3 = 22 °C):

Setup

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 61

Buffer solutions selected

Measured values (mV) recorded during calibration

Temperature-cor-rected measured values for TMean = 22 °C

1. Buffer 4.01 (at 25 °C) 172 mV 174.96 mV

2. Buffer 7.00 (at 25 °C) 0 mV 0 mV

3. Buffer 9.21 (at 25 °C) -129 mV -126.85 mV

Thirdly, the slope (TMean) and the mV value at 0 pH are (actually) recorded via linear regression for the pair of variates from mV (TMean) and pH. The zero point results from dividing the mV value at 0 pH by the slope (TMean):

Slope (TMean) = -58.15 mV value at 0 pH = 407.61 mV Zero point [pH] = mV value at 0 pH/Slope (TMean) = 7.010 [pH]

Lastly, the slope at (TMean) is back-calculated to the slope at (25 °C).

Slope (25 °C) = -58.74 (=99.3% of the theoretical value)

3.9.2 Segmented Calibration

In segmented calibration, linear regression is not carried out over all measuring points for the calibration curve. Instead, line segments are used that bind the individual calibration points to one another. Thus, a non-linear sensor reaction can be incorporated over a larger measurement range. For n standard solu-tions, (n-1) segments can be analyzed.

Segmented calibration is illustrated below using examples for an ISE sensor. (F- ).

-100

-50

0

50

100

150

200

0 1 2 3 4 5

As with linear segmentation, first the measured values are recorded:

Temperature recorded during calibration

Standard value (pX) at measuring tem-perature

Measured values (mV) recorded during calibration

Standard 1 25 °C 4.00 (at 25 °C) 162.0 mV

Standard 2 25 °C 2.00 (at 25 °C) 42.0 mV

Standard 3 25 °C 9.21 (at 25 °C) -15.0 mV

Setup

62 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

The mV measured values are then converted to the averaged temperature (not necessary in the example because the temperature is constantly 25 °C) and a linear regression is conducted for each segment. Thus, a slope and the mV value at 0 pH (both based on the averaged temperature) are recorded per segment and the zero point is calculated from both values, respectively:

Temperature recorded during calibration

mV value at 0 pH (based on TMean)

Slope (TMean) Zero point [pX]

Segment 1 25 °C -78.00 mV 60.00 1.30

Segment 2 25 °C -72.00 mV 57.00 1.26

Afterward, the slope is converted to the reference temperature of 25 °C (not necessary in this example, because (TMean) is already 25 °C.)

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 63

4. Methods

In order to conduct an analysis using the titrator, you need a Method. A method represents the program for conducting the analysis. It consists of a sequence of method functions (some with method subfunc-tions) that the titrator carries out in succession.In this chapter, you will learn how to access and define methods.

The basic building blocks of a titration method consist of sample preparation, stirring and wait times, the actual titration, result calculation and a record. The titrator defines these partial steps as functions that consist of parameters whose values can be changed.

Sample, titer and calibration loops

A method can contain one or more loops, depending on the type of instrument. The ranges of a method through which several samples will pass are defined using a "loop". The method functions before and after a loop are each conducted only once, even if an analysis contains several samples.The beginning and end of a sample loop are defined by the method functions "Sample" and "End of Sample". The "End of Sample" method function is executed, and the sample loop stopped, only after the last sample in a series.

• A sample loop serves to analyze a sample, a sensor can be calibrated with a calibration loop, and the titer of a titrant can be determined with a titer loop.

Method typesThe titrator distinguishes between three different types of methods with different objectives:

• GT Method for general titration (contains only sample loops or mixed loops)• Calib. Method for sensor calibration (contains only calibration loops)• Titer Method for titer determination, contains only calibration loops

Preloaded methods

A number of METTLER methods have already been loaded onto the instrument. These methods were developed by METTLER TOLEDO for specific uses and can be used immediately for analyses accordingly. (See "10.2 METTLER Methods")You can modify the METTLER methods according to your own specifications and save them as user methods. When creating methods you can revert to method templates, which, according to their objective, specify the structure of the method, and whose parameters already contain the most suitable default values.A maximum of 120 methods can be stored in the titrator.

Method ID

Different types of methods as well as individual methods of the same type are distinguished on the basis of their identification (ID):

• Each method has its own unique method identification. • The method ID for a Mettler method always consists of an "M" followed by a sequential number.

(M001, M002, …)• The method ID for a user method can be chosen at random, however it cannot begin with an "M"

followed by a number.

Methods

64 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

4.1 Starting Methods

The titrator offers various options for starting a method:

• From the method editor• By using the "Start Button" on the Home screen• By using a shortcut on the Home screen• By using the "Series" menu• By using the "Setup" menu (to perform a calibration or titer determination)

4.1.1 Starting Methods from the Method Editor

You can use the method editor to start any method stored in the titrator. Select:

Home > Methods

- Select the method you want to start from the method list displayed.- As soon as the method functions of the selected method appear on the screen, you can access the

start screen for analyses by pressing "Start".- By pressing "Start" again, you will come to an overview screen about the resources required for the

method. (Only if these were set up in the Analysis Procedure settings)- To execute the method, confirm this screen by pressing "OK".

4.2 Establishing Methods

You can establish a new method by changing the settings of a METTLER method and saving it under a new method ID, or by selecting an applicable method template from the list of suggestions, adjusting it, and saving it under a new ID. Select:

Home > Methods

- Press "New" to establish a new method using a template..- Select a method from the existing templates that is most similar to the method you would like to

create. Now you can adjust this method to your own specifications by adding or deleting method functions, or by adjusting the settings.- Assign a new method ID to the method in the method function "Title". Afterward, a new method will

be stored under this method ID.- Assign a title to your new method.- Select the available method functions in order to adjust them to your specifications.- Select "Insert" in order to insert additional method functions into the template.- Now, using the arrow-shaped "Insert" button, select the desired location in the method for the new

method function. (You will only be able to insert the method functions that are allowed in the cor-responding location selected based on the method syntax.)

- Select a method function from the list that you want to insert.- Adjust the individual settings of the method function to the resources.The new method function will be displayed in the method.- To delete a method function, select it and then press "Delete".

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 65

The method function will disappear from the method.- After you have inserted all of the necessary method functions, you can store the method in the titra-

tor by pressing "Save".

• When establishing a new method, follow the rules specified by the titrator. These are described in Chapter "4.5 Method Syntax – Rules for Establishing Methods".

4.3 Modifying Methods

You can modify both user and METTLER methods and save them under a new method ID.

• Upon modifying a METTLER method, you will only be able to save it as a copy (or as a user method) with a new method ID.

To modify a method, select:

Home > Methods

- Select the method you want to adjust from the method list displayed.- You can edit the method as soon as the method function for the selected method is displayed on

the screen.- Assign the method a new method ID in the method function "Title". Afterward, a new method will be

stored under this method ID.- Select the available method functions in order to adjust them to your specifications.- Select "Insert" in order to insert additional method functions into the template.- Now, using the arrow-shaped "Insert" button, select the desired location in the method for the new

method function. (You will only be able to insert the method functions that are allowed in the cor-responding location selected based on the method syntax.)

- Select a method function from the list that you want to insert.- Adjust the individual settings of the method function.The new method function will be displayed in the method.- To delete a method function, select it and then press "Delete".- After you have made all of the necessary adjustments, you can store the method in the titrator by

pressing "Save".

Methods

66 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

4.4 Deleting Methods

You can easily delete user-defined methods from the titrator. Select:

Home > Methods

- Select the method you would like to delete.- By pressing "Delete Method" you remove the method from the titrator's memory.

• METTLER methods cannot be deleted.

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 67

4.5 Method Syntax – Rules for Establishing Methods

A method consists of a sequence of method functions that are executed consecutively when a method is processed. When establishing a method, certain rules (method syntax) must be followed. These fundamental rules are described below: An overview of all of the method functions available is located in a table in Chapter 4.6 "Overview of Method Functions". The settings for each individual method function are described in Chapter 4.7 "Method Functions Settings".

4.5.1 Possible Number of Method Functions

Depending on the type of titrator, the maximum number of method functions that can be used within a method is limited:

Method function Number per method

T50 T70 T90Title 1 1 1Sample

Sensor calibra-tion

Total of three Total of sixSample (titer) Sample (calibration)Titration stand 1 6 12Rinse 1 10 10Conditioning 1 10 10Pump 2 10 10Park 1 6 12Stir 2 10 10Dispense (normal) 3 10 10Measure (normal) 2 20 20Titration (EQP)

Total of two Total of eight Total of ten

Titration (EP)Titration (EQP detection)Measure (MVT)StatingDispense (controlled)Titration (2-phase)Calculation 6 40 40End of sample 1 3 6Titer

Total of one Total of three Total of sixCalibrationAuxiliary value 4 30 30Blank value 1 10 10Auxiliary instrument 10 30 30Instruction 1 10 10Drain 1 10 10Record 2 10 10

• A total of 15 method functions can be used per method in the T50, for the T70 it is 60, and for the T90, 150 method functions can be used per method.

Methods

68 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

4.5.2 Types of Methods

The titrator distinguishes between three different types of methods with different objectives:

• GT Method for general titration• Calib. Method for sensor calibration• Titer Method for titer determination

The method type is assigned by the titrator and cannot be edited by the user. The corresponding settings are indicated only as an info field in the method function "Title".

If you are only conducting a sensor calibration in a method, "Calib" will be set as the method type. The same applies for a method in which only a titer determination is conducted – this method type will be indicated as "Titer". If a sample determination is conducted in a method (with or without additional titer determination or sensor calibration), the method type will be set to "GT" (General Titration). If a titer determination and a sensor calibration are conducted in a method, the method type indicated will also be "GT".

• If a method is subsequently changed, the titrator will also adjust the method type automatically.

4.5.3 Types and Possible Number of Loops

Loops (ranges that will run through several samples of a series) can be defined within a method. (For a description of the term "loop", see the beginning of Chapter "4. Methods".)There are essentially three different types of loops the titrator distinguishes that are defined by the method functions "Sample" and "End of Sample":

Loop type Method function Start of loop

Method functionEnd of loop

Sample loopCompletes a loop for sample determi-nation.

Sample End of sample

Titer loopCompletes a loop for titer determina-tion.

Sample (titer) End of sample

Calibration loopCompletes a loop for sensor calibra-tion.

Sample (calibration) End of sample

• Only entire loops can be inserted into, or deleted from, a method.• Nested loops are not possible.

Many different loops are allowed within a method depending on the particular type of method and type of instrument:

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 69

Method type Permissible loop types

Maximum number of loops per method

T50 T70 T90

GT Sample loopTiter loopCalibration loop

1 (a sample loop)

3 6

Titer Titer loop 1 3 6

Calib. Calibration loop 1 3 6

4.5.4 Entering and Deleting Loops

Only entire loops can be inserted into, or deleted from, a method.When inserting a loop using the method function "Sample", "Sample (Titer)" and "Sample (Calib)", a suitable corresponding template will be inserted that varies according to loop type:

Sample loop:

Sample

Titration stand (manual stand)

Stir

Titration (EQP)

Calculation

Record

End of sample

Titer loop:

Sample (titer)

Titration stand (manual stand)

Stir

Titration (EQP)

Calculation

Record

End of sample

Titer

Calibration loop:

Sample (calibration)

Titration stand (manual stand)

Stir

Measure (normal)

End of sample

Calibration

• When deleting one of the stored method functions listed above in gray, the entire loop will be de-leted from the method, including all of the method functions contained within it.

Methods

70 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

4.5.5 Method Functions Within a Loop

The choice of method functions that are allowed between the "Sample" and "End of Sample" method functions within a loop is limited and depends on the type of loop.

The following method functions are essentially permissible within a sample loop in arbitrary order. How-ever, for the method functions Titration Stand, Calculation, and Record, certain rules must be followed:

• Drain• Calculate• Blank• Dispense (Normal | Monitored)• Auxiliary instrument• Auxiliary value• Instruction• Condition• Measure (Normal)• Measure (MVT)• Pumps• Record• Stir• Rinse• Stating (Normal)• Titration (EP, EQP, two-phase, EQP detection) • Titration stand

• The options within a calibration loop are identical to those in the sample loop with the restriction that they cannot contain any titration or stating method functions and the method function "Mea-sure (Normal)" must occur (only) once in the loop.

• The same options that apply for the sample loop also apply for the titer loop, however the (titer) loop must contain at least one titration method function.

• The method function "Titration Stand" must appear immediately after the loop-initializing functions "Sample", "Sample (Calib)" or "Sample (Titer).

• It is best to insert the method function "Calculation" after the method function that determines the raw results for the calculation.

• The method function "Record" can be only inserted after the method function that generates the results the record should contain.

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 71

4.5.6 Method Functions Outside of a Loop

In addition to the preset method function "Title", which is always located at the beginning, additional method functions can be inserted outside of a loop depending on the type of method:

• Drain• Calculate• Blank• Dispense (Normal)• Auxiliary instrument• Auxiliary value• Instruction• Calibration• Condition • Pumps• Park• Record• Rinse• Titer

• The method function "Calibration" must appear immediately after the "End of Sample" method func-tion of a calibration loop.

• The method function "Titer" must appear immediately after the "End of Sample" method function of a titer loop.

• The method function "Park" must appear immediately after the "End of Sample", "Calibration" or "Titer" method function.

• The same options are available for calibration and titer methods. In addition, when entering a loop, enter the method functions "Calibration" or "Titer", as appropriate after the "End of Sample" function.

Methods

72 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Functions Explanation Within loop

Outsideloop

Title Title and characteristics of the method. No YesSample Start of a sample loop.

Start of loopSample (titer) Start of a loop for titer determinationSample (calibration) Start of a loop for sensor calibration.Titration stand Selects titration stand. Yes NoRinse Rinsing function for a sensor or stirrer, etc. Yes YesConditioning Conditioning function for sample changer. Yes YesPump Pumps a defined volume of a liquid. Yes YesPark Park function for sample changer. No YesStir Activates a stirrer. Yes NoDispense (normal) Dispenses a defined quantity of titrant. Yes YesMeasure (normal) Takes over monitoring a measured value

from a sensor.Yes No

Measure (MVT) Creates a table of measured values from the measured values of a sensor over a certain period of time.

Yes No

Titration (EQP) Conducts an equivalent-point titration. Yes NoTitration (EP) Conducts an end-point titration. Yes NoTitration (2-phase) Conducts a two-phase titration Yes NoTitration (EQP detection) Conducts an equivalent-point-detection Yes NoStating A sample solution can be maintained at a

constant pH value using the stating func-tion.

Yes No

Dispense (controlled) Controlled dispensing with potential or temperature monitoring.

Yes No

Calculation Converts the analysis results. Yes YesEnd of sample Concludes a sample loop. End of loopTiter Assigns the result of a titer sample loop to

a titer.No Yes

Calibration Assigns the result of a calibration loop to a sensor.

No Yes

Auxiliary value Assigns a result or an arbitrary value to an auxiliary value and updates the value stored in Setup.

Yes Yes

Blank value Assigns a result or an arbitrary value to a blank and updates the value stored in Setup.

Yes Yes

Auxiliary instrument Activates external auxiliary instruments. Yes YesInstruction Halts the analysis and displays instructions

on the screen for the user.Yes Yes

Drain Drains a volume from the sample vessel.. Yes YesRecord Defines the record data to be output to the

printer. Yes Yes

4.6 Overview of Method Functions

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 73

4.7 Method Function Settings

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Title No Yes

Description:

Defines the title and type of method, and manages characteristics such as creation and change dates, author, and whether the method should be protected.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Type Defines the fundamental type of method.(Info field)

General titration | Titer determination | Calibra-tion

Compatible with Defines the types of titrators on which the method can run. (Info field)

T50-90 | T70-90 | T90

ID Unique ID of the method. Arbitrary (cannot start with "M" followed by a numeric character)

Title Title of the method. Arbitrary

Author Author of the method. (Info field)

Logged-in user | Stan-dard user

Created on Creation date and creation time of the method.(Info field)

Date/Time

Modified on Change date of the method.(Info field)

Date

Modified by Name of the user who made the last change. (Info field) Logged-in user | Stan-dard user

Protect Protects the method against changes and deletion by any user other than the author or the administrator.

Yes | No

SOP Standard operating procedure: (SOP) None | Text | Link

SOP text Text for a standard operating procedure (if "SOP" = "text" is selected.) Arbitrary text

SOP ID ID for the link to a standard operating procedure (if "SOP" = "link" is selected.)

Arbitrary

Methods

74 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Method function: Withinloop:

Outside of loop:

Sample Start of loop

Description:

The method functions "Sample" and "End of Sample" define the beginning and the end of a sample loop. All of the method functions contained in a loop are conducted for each sample in a series. The method functions are conducted in accordance with "End of Sample" only after processing the last sample.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Number of IDs Defines the number of sample IDs to be defined. 1 … 3

ID 1 The name defined here will be used as the default name for the (first/only) sample on the sample loop.

Arbitrary

ID 2-3 The name defined here will be used as the default name for the respective sample on the sample loop. (Only appears subject to the settings made for "Number of IDs")

Arbitrary

Entry type Defines whether the sample should be added with a defined mass, defined volume or defined number of pieces. The sample data query will then adjust according to the unit of measurement.By selecting "fixed volume" or "fixed number of pieces" the sampling weight, sample volume or number of pieces will be entered as the param-eter in this method function and will not be prompted when conducting the method.

Weight | Fixed weight | Volume | Fixed volume | Number of pieces | Fixed number of pieces

Lower limit Defines the lower limit for the variable entry of the sample data. The unit will depend on the setting for the "entry type" parameter. Does not appear for "fixed" entry types.

[g] 0 … 1000[mL] 0 … 1000[Pcs.] 0 … 1000000

Upper limit Defines the upper limit for the variable entry of the sample data. The unit will depend on the setting for the "entry type" parameter. Does not appear for "fixed" entry types.

[g] 0 … 1000[mL] 0 … 1000[Pcs.] 0 … 1000000

Weight The sample weight(s) in [g]. Appears only if "entry type" = "fixed weight" was selected.

0 … 1000

Volume The sample volume(s) in [mL]. Appears only if "entry type" = "fixed vol-ume" was selected.

0 … 1000

Quantity The number of sample(s). Appears only if "entry type" = "fixed number of pieces" was selected.

0 … 1000000

Weight per piece The weight in [g] per item. Appears only if "entry type" = "number of pieces" or "fixed number of pieces" was selected.

0 … 1000

Density The density of a liquid sample substance, in [g/mL]. Appears only if "entry type" = "weight", "volume", "fixed weight" or "fixed volume" was selected.

0.0001 … 100

Correction factor Any correction factor that can be used in calculations. 0.0001 … 1000000

Temperature The temperature in [°C] during the analysis. If temperature monitoring is activated in a titration function, the system will ignore the sample tem-perature given here.

-20 … 200

Entry Determines the input time for the sample size. If "before" is selected, the sample size will have to be entered before the titration. A direct shortcut for starting immediately is not possible for this setting. If "Arbitrary" is selected, the sample size will have to be entered at any time during the titration (no later than when it is used during the calculations).Appears only if "fixed weight", "fixed volume" or "fixed number of pieces" was not selected for "entry type".

Before | Arbitrary

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 75

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Sample (titer) Start of loop

Description:

Start of a loop for titer determination. Contains all of the necessary data regarding the titrant and the standard to be used.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Titrant Name of the titrant. Select from the titrants defined in Setup.

Concentration The concentration of the selected titrant, in [mol/L].(Info field)

The concentration of the titrant as specified in Setup.

Standard The name of the standard for the titer determination. Select from the stan-dards defined in Setup.

Type of standard The type of the standard selected. (Info field) Determined | Liquid

Entry type Defines whether the quantity (weight or volume) of a liquid or solid stan-dard should be entered when the analysis is started or whether a "fixed weight" or a "fixed volume" should be defined in the method function.

Weight | Fixed Weight |Volume | Fixed Volume

Lower limit Defines the lower limit for the variable entry of the sample data. The unit will depend on the setting for the "entry type" parameter. Does not appear for "fixed" entry types.

[g] 0 … 1000[mL] 0 … 1000

Upper limit Defines the upper limit for the variable entry of the sample data. The unit will depend on the setting for the "entry type" parameter. Does not appear for "fixed" entry types.

[g] 0 … 1000[mL] 0 … 1000

Weight The weight of the standard in [g]. Appears only if "entry type" = "fixed weight" was selected.

0 … 1000

Volume The volume of the standard in [mL]. Appears only if "entry type" = "fixed volume" was selected.

0 … 1000

Correction factor Any correction factor that can be used in calculations. 0.0001 … 1000000

Temperature The temperature in [°C] during the titer determination. If temperature monitoring is activated in a titration function, the system will ignore the sample temperature given here.

-20 … 200

Entry Determines the input time for the standard quantity. If "Previous" is se-lected, the standard quantity will have to be entered before the titration. A direct shortcut for starting immediately is not possible for this setting. If "Arbitrary" is selected, the standard quantity will have to be entered at any time during the titration (no later than when it is used for the calcula-tions). Appears only if "fixed weight" or "fixed volume" was not selected for "entry type".

Before | Arbitrary

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Sample (calibration) Start of loop

Description:

Methods

76 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Start of a loop for sensor calibration. Contains all of the necessary data regarding the sensor and the calibration standard.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Sensor type Defines the type of the sensor to be calibrated. pH | ISE | Conductivity | Temperature

Sensor The name of the sensor. Select the correspond-ing type of sensors defined in Setup.

Ion charge The ion charge for the selected ISE sensor. (Appears only for ISE sensors) (Info field)

-3, -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3

Unit The unit of measure based on the type of sensor.(Info field for pH sensors only.)

ppm | pX for ISE sen-sorspH for pH sensors µS/cm | mS/cm for conductivity sensors°C | K | °F for tempera-ture sensors

Automatic buffer rec-ognition

Defines whether the titrator should automatically identify the buffers via the pH buffer list.Only possible for pH sensors.

Yes | No

pH buffer list Defines the pH buffer list to be used for the calibration of a pH sensor. Select from the pH buf-fer lists (Auto pH buffer lists) defined in Setup.

List of standards Defines the standards list to be used for the calibration of an ISE or conductivity sensor.

Select from the stan-dards lists defined in Setup.

Calibration Here you can define whether the calibration of a pH or ISE sensor should be done in a linear or segmented manner.

Linear | Segmented

Number of buffers The number of buffers to be used for the calibration of a pH sensor. 1 … 9

Number of standards The number of standards to be used for the calibration of an ISE sen-sor.

1 … 9

Buffer 1-9 For the calibration of a pH sensor, up to nine buffers can be selected from the pH buffer list.

Select from the buffer list.

Standards 1-9 For the calibration of an ISE sensor, up to nine standards can be selected from the standards list.

Select from the stan-dards list.

Standard For the calibration of a conductivity sensor, a standard can be selected here from the standards list.

Select from the stan-dards list.

Standards unit The unit of measure of the standard as specified in Setup. Appears only for conductivity sensors. (Info field)

µS/cm | mS/cm

Temperature The temperature during the calibration in [°C] if temperature acquisition has not been selected in the "Measurement (normal)" method function. Does not appear for temperature sensors.

-20 °C … 200 °C

Standard The standard for the calibration of a temperature sensor.(Info field)

Ice water (0.0 °C)

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Titration stand Yes No

Description:

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 77

Selects a titration stand. Subsequent method functions are based on this titration stand.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Type Defines the type of titration stand to be used. Manual stand,External stand,Auto stand,Rondolino TTL,Rondo60/TowerA,Rondo60/TowerB,DV705

Titration stand The name of the titration stand. Select the titration stands from the list specified in Setup.

Lid handling Defines whether before titration with a Rondo60 the lid of a sample should be removed with an attached CoverUp™ unit. This function is only pos-sible with a 20-sized rack.(Appears only if a Rondo60 is selected for the titration stand.)

Yes | No

Methods

78 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Rinse Yes Yes

Description:

Rinses a sensor.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Titration stand Selects a titration stand defined in the setup. Appears only if the method function "Rinse" is used outside of a sample loop.

Select the titration stands from the list specified in Setup.

Auxiliary reagent The auxiliary reagent to be used for the rinse. (This also indirectly defines the pump.)

Select from the auxil-iary reagents defined in Setup.

Rinse cycles The number of rinse cycles to be run. 1 … 100

Vol. per cycle The rinse volume in [mL] per cycle. 0 … 1000 or auxiliary value

Position Defines the position on the sample changer where the rinse procedure should be executed.The rinsing beaker can only be selected for a connected Rondo60.

Current position | Rins-ing beaker

Drain Defines whether the contents of the rinse vessel should be drained before starting the rinse procedure. This is always automatically set to "yes" if the "Position" has been set to "Rinse Beaker" or if more than one rinse cycle is executed.

Yes | No

Drain pump Defines the pump used to drain the contents of the rinse vessel. (Appears only if "drain" = "yes" is selected.)

Pump list

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 79

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Conditioning Yes Yes

Description:

Prepares a sensor for the next analysis.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Titration stand Activates a sample changer defined in the setup. Appears only if the method function "Conditioning" is used outside of a sample loop.

Rondo (as defined in the setup)

Type Specifies how the conditioning beaker position will be defined.• Fixed: The conditioning interval and the position of the conditioning

beaker will be defined in the method function.• Flexible: The position of the conditioning beaker(s) and the condi-

tioning interval will be defined by yellow clips directly at the beaker on the base of the Rondo rack.

Appears only if "Conditioning" is used within a sample loop.

Fixed | Flexible

Interval Defines the conditioning interval, i.e., after how many samples condition-ing will be performed. Appears only when "type" = "fixed" was selected and the method function is used within a loop.

1 … 60

Position Defines the position of the conditioning beaker. "According to interval" uses the defined interval to define the position(s)."According to interval" can only be selected if "type" = "fixed" was selected and method function is used within a loop.

According to interval | Special 1 | Special 2 | Conditioning beaker

Time Defines the conditioning period in [sec]. 1 … 10000

Speed The stirrer speed during conditioning [%]. 0 … 100

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

80 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Pump Yes Yes

Description:

Pumps a volume of an auxiliary reagent into, or drains a volume out of, a sample vessel.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Auxiliary reagent Defines the auxiliary reagent to be added. (This also indirectly defines the pump.)

Auxiliary reagents defined in Setup.

Volume The volume to be pumped, in [mL]. 0 … 1000 | Auxiliary value | Formula

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Park No Yes

Description:

Activates the park function for a sample changer. So that for instance the sensor can be deposited into a selected sample vessel at the end of a sample series.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Titration stand Selects the sample changer and the tower (for the Rondo60 ). Rondo60/1TowerA/Rondo60/1TowerB/Rondo60/2TowerA/Rondo60/2TowerB

Position Defines the position in which to park the titration head. Conditioning beaker | Rinse beaker | Special beaker 1 | Special bea-ker 2 | Current position | Current position +1

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 81

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Stir Yes No

Description:

Activates or deactivates (Speed = "0") the stirrer of the current titration stand.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0 … 100

Duration The stirring time, in [sec]. (Can also be defined by an auxiliary value or a formula.)After the conclusion of the stirring time, the titrator will continue to the next method function without switching off the stirrer. The method functions "End of sample" and "Titration stand" switch off the stirrer.The stirrer output is defined by the prior method function "Titration stand".

0 … 100000 | Auxil-iary value/Formula

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Dispense (normal) Yes Yes

Description:

Dispenses an exact quantity of titrant.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Titrant The titrant to be dispensed. Select from the titrants defined in Setup.

Concentration The concentration of the titrant, in [mol/L].(Info field)

Concentration of the titrant as specified in Setup.

Volume The volume to be dispensed, in [mL]. 0.0001 … 1000 | Aux-iliary value | Formula

Dosing rate Defines the dosing rate (not including the filling time), in [mL/min].You can also select a burette type-dependent maximum number.

0.01 … 60

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Methods

82 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Calculation Yes Yes

Description:

Converts the titration results.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Result After selecting a result from the dropdown list, the system will automati-cally set the "Result unit", "Formula" and "Constant" parameters. But you will be able to make any changes to them that you would like without having the system adjust the other parameters.You can also enter any number.

Results list | Arbitrary

Result unit The unit of the result. (Is not automatically adjusted after changes to "Formula" or "Constant".) You can also use the "Proposal" softkey to select from a predefined suggestion list.

Device list | Arbitrary

Formula The formula for calculating the result. You can also use the "Proposal" softkey to select from a predefined suggestion list.

Formula list | Arbitrary

Constant Definition of the C constant which can be used in the calculation. The constant can itself be a formula. You can also use the "Proposal" softkey to select from a predefined suggestion list.

Constants list | Arbitrary

M Molar mass. Select from the sub-stance and fixed titer standards list

z Equivalent number z (Info field) Select from the sub-stance list

Decimal places The number of decimal places for the result. 0 … 6

Result limits Defines whether limits should be observed for the result. If this function is activated, there will be a message in the record if the result falls outside the defined limits.

Yes | No

Lower limit Defines the lower result limit. Appears only if "result limit" = "yes" was selected.

-100000000 … 100000000

Upper limit Defines the upper result limit.Appears only if "result limit" = "yes" was selected.

-100000000 … 100000000

Interrupt if outside lim-its

Specifies whether the analysis or analysis series should be stopped as soon as one result lies outside the defined limit. Appears only if "result limit" = "yes" was selected.

Yes | No

Statistics printout Determines whether statistics should also be issued with the results in the protocol along with the result. If the method function "Protocol" "Results" = "No" selected then no statistics are produced.

Yes | No

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 83

Extra statistical func-tions

You can use this parameter to switch on extra statistical functions. For example, this will allow you to define a maximum value for the relative standard deviation which, if violated, will cause individual results to be listed in the record. The settings for this parameter will only be taken into consideration if the "Calculation" method function is used within a sample loop.

Yes | No

Max. srel If the relative standard deviation for the calculated result is above the "Max. srel", the system will output a corresponding message in the record. Ap-pears only if "additional statistic functionalities" = "yes" was selected.

0 … 100

Multiple determination This function helps you do statistical evaluations of sample groups. The sample groups are defined with the "Number of samples" param-eter.Appears only if "additional statistic functionalities" = "yes" was select-ed.

Yes | No

Number of samples Defines the sample groups for a multiple determination. A value of 3 for example means that the system will run a statistical evaluation on 3 samples in a row. Appears only if "additional statistic functionalities" and "multiple determi-nation" = "yes" was selected.

2 … 9

Max. srel If the relative standard deviation of a sample group within a multiple deter-mination is above the "Max. srel", the system will output a corresponding message in the record. Appears only if "additional statistic functionalities" and "multiple determi-nation" = "yes" was selected.

0 … 100

Interruption above max. srel

Specifies whether an analysis series should be terminated as soon as the relative standard deviation of a sample group within a multiple determina-tion is above the "Max. srel".Appears only if "additional statistic functionalities" and "multiple determi-nation" = "yes" was selected.

Yes | No

Record If "yes" is selected for "Record", the multiple determination function will create a record listing the groups after a double determination whose relative standard deviation lies above a "Max. srel" number defined in the method.Appears only if "additional statistic functionalities" and "multiple determi-nation" = "yes" was selected.

Yes | No

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

84 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Drain Yes Yes

Description:

Drains a volume from a sample vessel using a pump.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Drain pump Defines which pump to use. Pumps defined in Setup.

Drain volume The volume to be drained, in [mL]. 0 … 1000 | Auxiliary value | Formula

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 85

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Record Yes Yes

Description:

Specifies the type and range of data to be included in a record to be output to the printer.

Explanation:• "Last" – only the last analysis function (titration, stating or measuring) is included.• "All" – all of the previous analysis functions within the sample loop are included.

If the method function "Record" is placed within a sample loop, the record will include all previous method functions within the current sample loop.

If the method function "Record" is placed outside of a sample loop, the record will include all previous method functions listed after the last sample loop in the method procedure.A few settings are not available outside of a loop.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Results States whether or not a short summary of the results should appear at the top of the protocol.

Per sample | Per series | No Outside of loop: No | Yes

Raw results The results from the "Calculation" method functions. Any statistic selected will be recorded after the last sample of a series or multiple determina-tion.

Withinloop:: Per sample | Per series | NoOutside of loop: No | Yes

Table of measured val-ues

The raw results produced during the determination Withinloop:: Per sample | Per series | NoOutside of loop: No | Yes

Measured value table The table of measured values for the current sample. (not available out-side of loop)

Last titration function | All titration functions | No

Sample data The sample data of a sample loop. (Not available outside of loop) Per sample | Per series | No

Resource data All data in the setup regarding the resources used in the method. Per sample | Per series | No

E – V Titration curve of the current sample. The potential is plotted versus the volume. (Not available outside of loop)

Last | All | No

dE/dV – V The 1st derivative of the titration curve for potential against volume. (With linear ordinate display) (Not available outside of loop)

Last | All | No

log dE/dV – V The 1st derivative of the titration curve for potential against volume. (With logarithmic ordinate display) (Not available outside of loop)

Last | All | No

d2E/dV2 – V The 2nd derivative of the titration curve for potential against volume. (With linear ordinate display) (Not available outside of loop)

Last | All | No

Methods

86 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

E – t Titration curve of the current sample. The potential is plotted versus the time. (Not available outside of loop)

Last | All | No

V - t Titration curve of the current sample. The volume is plotted versus the time. (Not available Outside of loop)

Last | All | No

dV/dt - t The 1st derivative of the titration curve for volume against time. (Not available outside of loop)

Last | All | No

T - t Titration curve of the current sample. The temperature is plotted versus the time. (Not available Outside of loop)

Last | All | No

E - V & dE/dV - V Two superposed titration curves E – V and dE/dV – V for the current sample. (Not available Outside of loop)

Last | All | No

V - t & dV/dt - t Two superposed titration curves V – t and dV/dt – V for the current sample. (Not available Outside of loop)

Last | All | No

Calibration curve Calibration curve. The sensor measurement unit is plotted versus the measured values of all the samples. (Not available inside of loop)

No | Yes

Method Printout of the method used. No | Yes

Series data All data from the series run. No | Yes

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

End of sample End of loop

Description:

Concludes a sample loop. A sample loop refers to the range of a method through which a sample series will pass for each sample. The commencement of a sample loop is specified using the "Sample" method function.

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Titer No Yes

Description:

Assigns the result of a sample loop to a titer and updates the value stored in Setup.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Titrant The titrant defined in the previous method function "Sample (titer)". (Info field)

Titrant defined in Setup.

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 87

Concentration The concentration of the titrant, in [mol/L], defined in the previous method function "Sample (titer)". (Info field)

Concentration of the titrant as specified in Setup.

TITER= Specifies for how many results the titer should be determined. (For i=1, i does not have to be defined.)

Mean[Ri], i=1 … 30

Limits Specifies whether limits should be defined for the titer acquisition. If the titer determined is outside these limits, the titer will not be acquired in the titrant setup.

Yes | No

Lower limit Defines the lower limit for the titer. Appears only if the "limits" = "yes" setting was selected.

0 … 100

Upper limit Defines the upper limit for the titer. Appears only if the "limits" = "yes" setting was selected.

0 … 100

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Calibration No Yes

Description:

Assigns the result of a calibration loop to a sensor and updates the sensor setup.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Sensor The sensor defined in the previous method function "Sample (Calib)". (Info field)

Sensors defined in Set-up.

Limits Specifies whether limits should be defined for acquisition of the calibration result. If one of the results from the sensor calibration is outside these limits, the calibration data will not be acquired in the sensor setup.In cases of segmented calibration for pH and ISE sensors, the limits will be defined and observed for each segment.

Yes | No

Sensor type:

pH

Min. slope 1-8 The lower limit for the slope, in [%].(100% refers to -59.16 mV/pH.)

10 … 200

Max. slope 1-8 The upper limit for the slope, in [%].(100% refers to -59.16 mV/pH.)

10 … 200

Min. zero point 1-8 [pH]

The lower limit for the zero point. -100 … 100

Max. zero point 1-8 [pH]

The upper limit for the zero point. -100 … 100

Methods

88 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

ISE

Min. slope 1-8 The lower limit for the slope, in [%].(100% refers to (-59.16 mV/[unit])/ion loading.)

10 … 200

Max. slope 1-8 The upper limit for the slope, in [%].(100% refers to (-59.16 mV/[unit])/ion loading.)

10 … 200

Min. zero point 1-8

The lower limit for the zero point.The unit corresponds to the unit specified in the previous method func-tion, "Sample (Calib)".

-100 … 100

Max. zero point 1-8

The upper limit for the zero point.The unit corresponds to the unit specified in the previous method func-tion, "Sample (Calib)".

-100 … 100

Con

duct

ivity

Min. cell constant Defines the lower limit for the cell constant of a conductivity sensor, in [1/cm].

0 … 100

Max. cell constant Defines the upper limit for the cell constant of a conductivity sensor, in [1/cm].

0 … 100

Tem

pera

ture

Min. zero point Defines the lower limit for the zero point for a temperature sensor. (Info field)

-2.0 for °C unit271.2 for K unit28.4 for °F unit

Max. zero point Defines the upper limit for the zero point of a temperature sensor. (Info field)

2.0 for °C unit275.2 for K unit35.6 for °F unit

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Auxiliary value Yes Yes

Description:

Assigns a result or arbitrary value to an auxiliary value.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Name The name of the auxiliary value. Auxiliary values list in Setup.

Formula Here you can enter a formula that will be used to convert the result of the sample loop to the auxiliary value. You can also enter a number or an auxiliary value.

Formula (See "9. Analysis and Calculation") | Auxiliary value | Number

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 89

Limits Specifies whether limits should be defined for acquisition of the result as an auxiliary value. If the result is outside the defined limits, it will not be acquired as an auxiliary value.

Yes | No

Lower limit Appears only if "limits" = "yes" was selected. -100000000 … 100000000

Upper limit Appears only if "limits" = "yes" was selected. -100000000 … 100000000

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Blank value Yes Yes

Description:

Assigns a result or arbitrary value to a blank.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Name The name of the blank. Blank list in Setup.

Value Here you can enter a formula that will be used to convert the sample loop result to the blank. You can also enter a number or an auxiliary value.

Formula (See "9. Analysis and Calculation") | Auxiliary value | Number

Unit The unit of the blank. Arbitrary

Limits Specifies whether limits should be defined for acquisition of the result as a blank. If the result is outside the defined limits, it will not be acquired as a blank.

Yes | No

Lower limit Defines the lower limit for acquisition of the result as a blank. Appears only if "limits" = "yes" was selected.

-100000000 … 100000000

Upper limit Defines the upper limit for acquisition of the result as a blank. Appears only if "limits" = "yes" was selected.

-100000000 … 100000000

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

90 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Auxiliary instrument Yes Yes

Description:

Activates external auxiliary instruments and enables the titrator to be activated by external instruments.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Control type The control type of the auxiliary instrument. 24 V output | Stirrer |TTL out (single pin)TTL input (single pin)TTL (multipin)RS-232

Name The name of the auxiliary instrument. Auxiliary instrument list in Setup.

Control type

24 V

out

put

Mode Defines the mode for controlling the control outlet.• Fixed time: The control outlet is switched on during the specified

time period.• On | Off: The control outlet is switched on or off. After a sample

series the control outlet is automatically switched off.

On | Off | Fixed time

Time If "mode" = "fixed time" was selected, a time span in [sec] can be defined here for which the control outlet should be switched on.

0 … 1000000

Stirr

er

Mode Defines the mode for controlling the control outlet.• Fixed time: The control outlet is switched on during the specified

time span.• On | Off: The control outlet is switched on or off. After the sample

series the control outlet is automatically switched off.

On | Off | Fixed time

Time If "mode" = "fixed time" was selected, a time span in [sec] can be defined here for which the control outlet should be switched on.

0 … 1000000

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. Appears only if "mode" = "off" was selected.

0 … 100

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 91

TTL

out (

sing

le p

in)

Mode Determines the number and type of TTL signal issued.• Fixed time: The control outlet is switched on during the specified

time span.• On | Off: The control outlet is switched on or off.• Input-controlled: A signal received at the control inlet controls the

control outlet. The Auxiliary Instrument function will be terminated as soon as the signal changes at the control inlet or after a defined maximum time has expired.

• Sequential: The control outlet runs through a defined sequence.

Fixed time | On | Off | Input-controlled | Sequential

Time If "mode" = "fixed time" was selected, a time span in [sec] can be defined here for which the control outlet should be switched on.

0 … 1000000

Input The name of the auxiliary instrument to serve as the signal output (con-trol inlet).Appears only for "mode" = "input-controlled".

Auxiliary instrument list in Setup

Output signal Normal: The signal is transmitted without conversion.Inverted: The signal is transmitted in inverted form.Appears only for "mode" = "input-controlled".

Normal | Inverted

Max. time The maximum waiting time for a signal change, in [sec].After it expires, the method will be continued even if no signal change was detected.Appears only for "mode" = "input-controlled".

0 … 1000000

Number of pulses The number of impulses in the planned sequence.Appears only for "mode" = "sequential".

0 … 10000

Pulse duration The duration of a pulse in [sec] (time switched on + time switched off). Appears only for "mode" = "sequential".

0 … 1000000

Interval Defines the time span, in [sec], between two impulse starts.Appears only for "mode" = "sequential".

0 … 1000000

TTL

inpu

t (si

ngle

pin

) Input signal The control signal to be recognized.Increasing: The system recognizes an increasing input signal.Decreasing: The system recognizes a decreasing input signal.

Increasing | Decreasing

Max. time The maximum waiting time for a signal change, in [sec].After it expires, the method will be continued even if no signal change was detected.

0 … 1000000

Methods

92 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

TTL

(mul

tipin

)

Input/Output Defines the communication direction. Output | Input

Pin Selects a pin (1, 2, 3 or 4).For communication direction "output" only.

1 … 4

Mode Determines the number and type of TTL signal issued.Fixed time: The control outlet is switched on during the specified time span.On | Off: The control outlet is switched on or off.Input-controlled: A signal received at the control inlet controls the control outlet. The Auxiliary Instrument function will be terminated as soon as the signal changes at the control inlet or after a defined maximum time has expired.Sequential: The control outlet runs through a defined sequence.For communication direction "output" only.

Fixed time | On | Off | Input-controlled | Se-quential

Time If "mode" = "fixed time" was selected, a time span in [sec] can be defined here for which the control outlet should be switched on.

0 … 1000000

Input The name of the auxiliary instrument to serve as the signal output (con-trol inlet). For communication direction "output" and "input-controlled" mode only.

Auxiliary instrument list in Setup

Output signal Normal: The signal is transmitted without conversion.Inverted: The signal is transmitted in inverted form.Appears for the "output" communication direction and the "input-con-trolled" mode.

Normal | Inverted

Max. time The maximum waiting time for a signal change, in [sec]. Afterward, the method will be continued even if no signal change was detected. Ap-pears for the communication direction "output" only if "mode" = "input-controlled" is selected.

0 … 1000000

Number of pulses The number of impulses in the planned sequence. For communication direction "output" and "sequential" mode only.

0 … 10000

Pulse duration The duration of a pulse, in [sec]. For communication direction "output" and "sequential" mode only.

0 … 1000000

Interval Defines the time span, in [sec], between two impulses. For communica-tion direction "output" and "sequential" mode only.

0 … 1000000

Pin Selects a pin (1 or 2).For communication direction "input" only.

1 … 2

Input signal Indicates whether an increasing or a decreasing input signal should be detected. For communication direction "input" only.

Increasing | Decreasing

RS-2

32

Output sequence The control sequence for the signal receiver – can also contain a formula enclosed in control characters.

Arbitrary, including en-closed formula (control characters: %)

Wait for response Defines whether the system should wait for a response sequence from the device.

Yes | No

Input sequence The response sequence from the external device.Appears only if "wait for response" = "yes" was selected.

Arbitrary

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 93

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Instruction Yes Yes

Description:

Halts the analysis and displays instructions on the screen for the user. Either the user has to confirm the instructions or they will disappear automatically after a certain period.

Available settings: Explanation: Value range

Instruction The text of the instructions to be output to the display. This text can also contain a formula or auxiliary values, enclosed in percent symbols.Example: "Add %VEQ*m/z% g". (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Arbitrary, including en-closed formula (control characters: %)

Continue after Confirmation: The analysis will continue as soon as the user confirms the instructions.Time span: The analysis will continue after the defined time period has elapsed.

Confirmation | Time span

Time span The time period, in [sec], during which the analysis is terminated and the instructions are displayed on the screen.Appears only if "display mode" = "time span" was selected.

0 … 1000000

Print If "yes" is selected, the instructions will be output to a connected printer. Yes | No

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

94 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

The methods described below

• Measure (normal)• Measure (MVT)• Titration (EQP)• Titration (EP)• Titration (2-phase)• Titration (Learn EQP)• Stating• Dose (monitored)

contain subfunctions, which in turn contain their own settings.

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 95

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Measure (normal) Yes No

Description:

Controls the acquisition of a measured value from a sensor. If a temperature sensor is selected for the measurement, the subfunction "Temperature acquisition" is omitted.

Subfunction | Setting: Explanation: Value range

Sens

or

Type The type of sensor to be used to perform the measurement. (Info field if the method function is used within a calibration loop.)

mV | pH | ISE | Phototro-de | Polarized| Tempera-ture | Conductivity

Sensor The name of the sensor. Sensor list of the sensor type selected in Setup

Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will depend on the sensor type selected.

Depending on the se-lected sensor:mV | pH | pM | pX | ppm | %T | A | µA | °C | K | °F | µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS

Ion charge The ion charge of an ISE sensor. (Info field) Sensor setup

Indication Defines how to do the indication. Depending on the unit of mea-sure: [mV] = voltametric, [µA] = amperometric. (Info field for polarized sensors.)

Voltametric | Ampero-metric

Ipol Ipol is the polarization current, in [µA], for a voltametric indication. (Only for polarized sensors with "indication" = "voltametric".)

0.0 … 24.0

Upol Upol is the polarization voltage, in [mV], for an amperometric indication. (Only for polarized sensors with "indication" = "am-perometric".)

0 … 2000.0

Tem

pera

ture

acq

uisi

tion

Temperature acquisi-tion

Defines whether to record the temperature, with the aid of a tem-perature sensor, during the execution of the analysis function.

Yes | No

Temperature sensor Defines which temperature sensor to use for the temperature ac-quisition. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisi-tion".)

List of the temperature sensors in Setup

Unit The temperature unit you want to use. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

°C | K | °F

Stir

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0 … 100

Methods

96 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Acqu

isiti

on o

f the

mea

sure

d va

lues

Acquisition Defines how the measured value is acquired.• equilibrium-controlled: The measured value is acquired as

soon as it stabilizes.• Fixed: The measured value is acquired after a defined wait-

ing period.• Set value: The measured value is acquired as soon as it has

exceeded, or fallen short of, a specific set value. (The Set Value option is not available if the method function is used within a Sample (Calib) loop.)

Balance-controlled | Fixed | Set value

mV,

pH,

ISE,

Pho

totro

de, P

olar

ized

, Con

duct

ivity

dE Defines the measured value interval. As soon as the change in the measured value over the time period dt is less than dE, the measured value will be acquired. This occurs within the defined time interval of t(min) to t(max).In doing so, dE will be indicated in the unchanged unit of the sensor per second:• mV for sensor types mV, pH, ISE, phototrode and voltametri-

cally polarized• µA for amperometrically polarized• mS | µS for conductivity sensor(For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)

0.02 … 15

dt Defines the time component, in [sec] for dE/dt. (For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)

1 … 150

t(min) Earliest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. (For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)

1 … 150

t(max) Latest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. (For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)

1 … 100000

Time Waiting time, in [sec], before acquisition of a measured value when "acquisition" = "Fixed".

1 … 100000

Mode Mode for the measured value acquisition of the "set value". • E > Set value acquires the measured value as soon as the

set value has been exceeded.• E < Set value acquires the measured value as soon as the

set value has fallen short.Not available within a calibration loop. (For "acquisition" = "set value" only.)

E > set value |E < set value

Set value Set value in the sensor unit. Measured values will be acquired after they exceed or fall below this value, depending on the mode setting. (For "acquisition" = "set value" only.) Not available within a calibration loop.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band")

t(max) Latest time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. (For "ac-quisition" = "set value" only.) Not available within a calibration loop.

1 … 100000

Mean value The system finds a mean value for the saved measured value, using a maximum of 10 measured values.

Yes | No

No. of measured values

When you want to calculate a mean value, you can define the number of measured values used to find that mean value here.

1 … 10

dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for the measured value acqui-sition of the measured values to be averaged. (Appears only if "mean value" = "yes" is selected.)

1 … 60

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 97

Acqu

isiti

on o

f the

mea

sure

d va

lues

Tem

pera

ture

sen

sor

dT Defines the measured value interval. As soon as the change in the measured value during the time period dt is less than dT, the measured value will be acquired. This occurs within the defined time interval of t(min) to t(max).In doing so, the specification takes place in the unchanged unit of the sensor, per second:• °C | K | °F(For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)

0.1 … 10 Unit: °C | K | °F

dt Defines the time component, in [sec] for dT/dt. (For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)

1 … 150

t(min) Earliest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. (For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)

1 … 150

t(max) Latest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. (For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)

1 … 100000

Time Waiting time, in [sec], before acquisition of a measured value when "fixed".

1 … 100000

Mode Mode for the measured value acquisition of the "set value". • T > Set value acquires the measured value as soon as the

set value has been exceeded.• T < Set value acquires the measured value as soon as the

set value has fallen short. (For "acquisition" = "set value" only.)Not available within a calibration loop.

T > set value | T < set value

Set value Set value in the sensor unit. Measured values will be acquired after they exceed or fall below this value, depending on the mode setting. (For "acquisition" = "set value" only.) Not available within a calibration loop.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band")

t(max) Latest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. (For "acquisition" = "set value" only.) Not available within a cali-bration loop.

1 … 100000

Mean value The system finds a mean value for the saved measured value, using a maximum of 10 measured values.

Yes | No

No. of measured values

When you want to calculate a mean value, you can define the number of measured values used to find that mean value here.

1 … 10

dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for the measured value acqui-sition of the measured values to be averaged. (Appears only if "mean value" = "yes" is selected.)

1 … 60

Con

ditio

n

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condition is true, the system will execute the method func-tion. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will de-termine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calculation. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

98 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Measure (MVT) Yes No

Description:

Continuously logs the measured value of a sensor. Maximum of 1000 measured values in a specific time period. If a tem-perature sensor is selected for the measurement, the subfunction "Temperature acquisition" is omitted.

Subfunction | Setting: Explanation: Value range

Sens

or

Type The type of sensor to be used to perform the measurement. (Info field if the method function is used within a calibration loop.)

mV | pH | ISE | Phototro-de | Polarized| Temper-ature | Conductivity

Sensor The name of the sensor. Sensor list of the sensor type selected in Setup

Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will depend on the sensor type selected.

Depending on the selected sensor:mV | pH | pM | pX | ppm | %T | A | µA | °C | K | °F | µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS

Ion charge The ion charge of an ISE sensor. (Info field) Sensor setup

Indication Defines how to do the indication. Depending on the unit of measure: [mV] = voltametric, [µA] = amperometric. (Info field for polarized sensors.)

Voltametric | Ampero-metric

Ipol Ipol is the polarization current, in [µA], for a voltametric indica-tion.(Only for polarized sensors with "indication" = "voltametric".)

0.0 … 24.0

Upol Upol is the polarization voltage, in [mV], for an amperomet-ric indication. (Only for polarized sensors with "indication" = "amperometric".)

0 … 2000.0

Tem

pera

ture

acq

uisi

tion

Temperature acquisi-tion

Defines whether to record the temperature, with the aid of a tempera-ture sensor, during the execution of the analysis function.

Yes | No

Temperature sensor Defines which temperature sensor to use for the temperature acqui-sition. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

List of the temperature sensors in Setup

Unit The temperature unit you want to use. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

°C | K | °F

Stir

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [sec]. 0 … 100

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 99

Savi

ng m

easu

red

valu

es Interval Defines the interval, in [sec], for saving the measured values. 0.1 … 1000000

t(max) Defines the time, in [min], during which the measured values should be collected.

1 … 1000000

Con

ditio

n

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condition is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will de-termine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

100 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Titration (EQP) Yes No

Description:

Conducts an equivalent-point titration.

Subfunction | Setting: Explanation: Value range

Titra

nt

Titrant The titrant to be used for the titration. Titrant list in Setup

Concentration The concentration of the selected titrant, in [mol/L]. This number is acquired from the titrant list and cannot be edited. (Info field)

Titrant list in Setup

Sens

or

Type The type of sensor to be used to perform the measurement. mV | pH | ISE | Phototro-de | Polarized| Temper-ature | Conductivity

Sensor The name of the sensor. Sensor list of the sensor type selected in Setup

Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will depend on the sensor type selected.

Depending on the selected sensor:mV | pH | pM | pX | ppm | %T | A | µA | °C | K | °F | µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS

Ion charge The ion charge of an ISE sensor. (Info field) Sensor setup

Indication Defines how to do the indication. Depending on the unit of measure: [mV] = voltametric, [µA] = amperometric. (Info field for polarized sensors.)

Voltametric | Ampero-metric

Ipol Ipol is the polarization current, in [µA], for a voltametric indication.(Only for polarized sensors with "indication" = "voltametric".)

0.0 … 24.0

Upol Upol is the polarization voltage, in [mV], for an amperometric indi-cation. (Only for polarized sensors with "indication" = "amperomet-ric".)

0 … 2000.0

Tem

pera

ture

acq

uisi

tion Temperature acquisi-

tionDefines whether to record the temperature, with the aid of a tempera-ture sensor, during the execution of the analysis function.

Yes | No

Temperature sensor Defines which temperature sensor to use for the temperature acquisi-tion. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

List of the temperature sensors in Setup

Unit The temperature unit you want to use. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

°C | K | °F

Stir

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0 … 100

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 101

Pred

ispe

nsin

gMode Specifies the type of addition:

• Volume: predispenses a specific volume.• Potential: system predispenses a substance until a certain

potential is reached.• Factor: predispenses a multiple (defined in "Factor") of the

sample size.• None: No predispensing.

Volume | Potential | Factor | None

Volume The volume, in [mL], to be predispensed.(For "mode" = "volume" only.)

0.0001 … 1000 | Aux-iliary value | Formula

Potential The potential at which you want to stop predispensing.(For "mode" = "potential" only.)

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Factor The system calculates the predispensing volume by multiplying the factor by the sample size.(For "mode" = "factor" only.)

0 … 100000 | Auxiliary value | Formula

Wait time Defines a waiting time, in [sec]. (Either after the predispensing or, if "predispensing" was set to "none", before the start of titration.)

0 … 32000

Con

trol

Control Here you can select from among three predefined control modes ("Normal" | "Fast" | "Slow"), or you can select "user" to define all the parameters as freely editable.If you change from "Normal", "Fast" or "Slow" to "User", the system will copy over the predefined parameter settings and they will then be freely editable.

Normal | Fast | Slow | User

Mode You can select from a list of applications depending on the control mode selected ("Normal", "Fast" or "Slow"). The selected application will then provide its own specific parameter set. (Not for "control" = "user")

Application list

Display parameters Here you can select whether to display the preset parameters of the control modes "Normal", "Fast" or "Slow" as non-editable info fields. (Not for "control" = "user")

Yes | No

Titrant addition Defines whether to always dispense the same volume defined by dV ("incremental") or to adjust the volume to be titrated per step as the titration progresses ("dynamic"). (For control mode "user" only)

Dynamic | Incremental

dE(target) Defines the potential difference targeted per titrant addition.(For control mode "user" and dynamic titrant addition only)

[mV/µA] 0.1 … 100 [mS/µS] 0.01 … 100

dT(target value) Defines the temperature difference in the unit of the temperature sen-sor that is targeted for a temperature sensor per titrant addition.(For control mode "user" and dynamic titrant addition only)

0.1 … 100

Methods

102 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Con

trol

dV(min) Defines the minimum amount for a titrant addition, in [mL]. (For control mode "user" and dynamic titrant addition only)

0.0001 … 1

dV(max) Defines the maximum amount for a titrant addition, in [mL]. (For control mode "user" and dynamic titrant addition only.)

0.0001 … 10

dV Defines the volume increment, in [mL], for the incremental titrant addi-tion. (For control mode "user" and incremental titrant addition only)

0.0001 … 10

Meas. val. acquisition Type of measuring value acquisition:• equilibrium-controlled: The system acquires the measured

value and makes the next titrant addition as soon as a stable measured value is established.

• Fixed time: The measured values acquisition and titrant addition occur according to fixed time intervals.

(For control mode "user" only)

Equilibrium-controlled | Fixed time

dE As soon as the change in the measured value during the time period dt is less than dE, the measured value will be acquired. Acquisition takes place no earlier than after t(min) and no later than after t(max). Then the next titrant addition is conducted.(For control mode "user" and equilibrium-controlled measured value acquisition only)

[mV/µA] 0.1 … 15 [mS/µS] 0.01 … 15

dT As soon as the change in the measured value during the time period dt is less than dT, the measured value will be acquired. Acquisition takes place no earlier than after t(min) and no later than after t(max). Then the next titrant addition is conducted.(For control mode "user" and incremental equilibrium-controlled measured value acquisition for a temperature sensor only.)

0.1 … 15

dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for calculating dE/dt (or dT/dt for a temperature sensor).(For control mode "user" and equilibrium-controlled measured value acquisition only)

0.1 … 15

t(min) Earliest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec].(For control mode "user" and equilibrium-controlled measured value acquisition only)

0.5 … 150

t(max) Latest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec].(For control mode "user" and equilibrium-controlled measured value acquisition only)

1 … 100000

dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for the "fixed time" measured value acquisition.(For control mode "user" and measured value acquisition = "fixed time" only.)

0.5 … 6000

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 103

Eval

uatio

n an

d re

cogn

ition

Procedure Defines which evaluation procedure to use. Standard | Asymmetric | Minimum | Maximum | Segmented

Threshold Defines the threshold (absolute amount) that must be exceeded for the recognition of an EQP.This threshold references the original curve for the "Minimum" and "Maximum" evaluation procedures, the first derivation of the original curve for "Standard" and "Asymmetrical", and the second derivation of the original curve for "Segmented".

Standard | Asymmetric | Segmented:0 … 1000000Minimum | Maximum: (See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Tendency Defines the tendency for which the EQP is to be detected.(For "evaluation procedures" = "standard" and "asymmetric")

Positive | Negative | None

Ranges You can define up to three recognition ranges. Outside these ranges, the system will recognize neither EQPs nor EQP candidates.Depending on what is defined here, upper and lower limits will be defined for each recognition range and also whether additional EQP criteria are to be used for each recognition range.

1 | 2 | 3 | 0

Lower limit 1-3 Defines the lower limit for the recognition range. Does not appear if "0" was selected for "ranges". The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Upper limit 1-3 Defines the upper limit for the recognition range. Does not appear if "0" was selected for "ranges". The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Add. EQP criteria Defines whether to take additional EQP criteria into consideration. The available selection will depend on the evaluation procedure chosen. They can be defined individually for each recognition range or for the overall recognition range ("recognition ranges" = "0").• Last EQP: The system only considers the quantity of EQPs defined

under "Last jumps".• Steepest jump: The system only considers the quantity of steepest

jumps defined under "Steepest jumps".• Lowest value The system only considers the quantity of lowest

values defined under "Lowest values".• Highest value The system only considers the quantity of highest

values defined under "Highest values".

Last EQP | Steepest jump | Lowest value | Highest value | No

Last jumps The quantity of last jumps to be taken into consideration. (For "add. EQP criteria" = "last EQP" only.)

1 … 9

Steepest jumps The quantity of steepest jumps to be taken into consideration. (For "add. EQP criteria" = "steepest jump" only.)

1 … 9

Lowest values The quantity of lowest values to be taken into consideration. (For "add. EQP criteria" = "lowest value" only.)

1 … 9

Highest values The quantity of highest values to be taken into consideration. (For "add. EQP criteria" = "highest value" only.)

1 … 9

Methods

104 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Term

inat

ion

At Vmax Defines the maximum volume, in [mL], at which the titration must be terminated if it has not been terminated already.

0.1 … 1000

At potential Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching a defined potential (with the correct tendency!).

Yes | No

Potential The potential at which to terminate the titration. The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.(For "at potential" = "yes" only.)

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Termination tendency Defines for which tendency the titration should be terminated. (For "at potential" = "yes" only.)

Positive | Negative | None

At slope Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching a defined slope. This absolute value must be exceeded by one measured value and then be greater than two measured values to result in termina-tion.

Yes | No

Slope The slope, in [unit of measure/mL], at which to terminate the titra-tion.(For "at slope" = "yes" only.)

0 … 100000

After number of recog-nized EQPs

Specifies whether the titration should be terminated after the recogni-tion of a specific quantity of EQP candidates.The EQP candidates must:- be within the recognition range,- be over the threshold, and- exhibit the correct tendency.If no additional EQP criteria should be considered, then EQP candi-date = EQP applies.

Yes | No

Number of EQPs Defines the quantity of EQP candidates after the recognition of which the system should terminate the titration.(For "after number of recognized EQPs" = "yes" only.)

1 … 30

Combined termination criteria

No: Termination as soon as the first of the selected criteria from the [Potential | Slope | Number of recognized EQPs] group has been fulfilled.Yes: Termination as soon as all the selected criteria have been ful-filled.Termination of the titration in any case if the maximum volume is reached.

Yes | No

Acco

mpa

nyin

g st

atin

g

For T70/T90 only.In the case of titration accompanied by stating, the method function "Stating" is used as a subfunction.The settings correspond to those for the method function "Stating" and can therefore be found in the description of the method function "Stating".Titration accompanied by stating allows a sample solution to be maintained at a specific electrode potential during EQP, EP or two-phase titration. This is a stating that runs parallel to the actual titration and differs from the "Stating" method function as follows:• The accompanying stating begins and ends with the "Main" method function (titration) and therefore does not include

the subfunction "Termination".• The accompanying stating does not include the settings "Stirring", and "Saving Measured Values".• The subfunctions "Predispensing" and "Pretitration" are conducted prior to the main method function.• As soon as the subfunctions "Predispensing" and "Pretitration" have been concluded, the main method function

begins, in which the stating continues to run parallel for the duration of the titration.• Temperature acquisition is specified in the main method function.

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 105

Con

ditio

nCondition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this

condition is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will deter-mine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Titration (EP) Yes No

Description:

Conducts an end-point titration.

Subfunction | Setting: Explanation: Value range

Titra

nt

Titrant The titrant to be used for the titration. Titrant list in Setup

Concentration The concentration of the selected titrant, in [mol/L]. This number is acquired from the titrant list and cannot be edited. (Info field)

Titrant list in Setup

Sens

or

Type The type of sensor to be used to perform the measurement. mV | pH | ISE | Phototro-de | Polarized| Temper-ature | Conductivity

Sensor The name of the sensor. Sensor list of the sensor type selected in Setup

Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will depend on the sensor type selected.

Depending on the se-lected sensor:mV | pH | pM | pX | ppm | %T | A | µA | °C | K | °F | µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS

Ion charge The ion charge of an ISE sensor. (Info field) Sensor setup

Indication Defines how to do the indication. Depending on the unit of measure: [mV] = voltametric, [µA] = amperometric. (Info field for polarized sensors.)

Voltametric | Ampero-metric

Ipol Ipol is the polarization current, in [µA], for a voltametric indication.(Only for polarized sensors with "indication" = "voltametric".)

0.0 … 24.0

Upol Upol is the polarization voltage, in [mV], for an amperometric indi-cation. (Only for polarized sensors with "indication" = "amperomet-ric".)

0 … 2000.0

Methods

106 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Tem

pera

ture

acq

uisi

tion Temperature acquisi-

tionDefines whether to record the temperature, with the aid of a tempera-ture sensor, during the execution of the analysis function.

Yes | No

Temperature sensor Defines which temperature sensor to use for the temperature acquisi-tion. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

List of the temperature sensors in Setup

Unit The temperature unit you want to use. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

°C | K | °F

Stir

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0 … 100

Pred

ispe

nsin

g

Mode Specifies the type of addition:• Volume: predispenses a specific volume.• Potential: system predispenses a substance until a certain

potential is reached.• Factor: predispenses a multiple (defined in "Factor") of the

sample size.• None: No predispensing.

Volume | Potential | Factor | None

Volume The volume to be predispensed, in [mL].(For "mode" = "volume" only.)

0.0001 … 1000 | Aux-iliary value | Formula

Potential The potential at which you want to stop predispensing. The unit will depend on the sensor used.(For "mode" = "potential" only.)

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Factor The system calculates the predispensing volume by multiplying the factor by the sample size.(For "mode" = "factor" only.)

0 … 100000 | Auxil-iary value | Formula

Wait time Defines a waiting time, in [sec]. (Either after the predispensing or, if "predispensing" was set to "none", before the start of titration.)

0 … 32000

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 107

Con

trol

End point type • Absolute: Titration is ended when the absolute measured value is reached.

• Relative: The system will take into consideration the difference between the desired end point and the measured value at the start of the titration.

Absolute | Relative

Tendency Defines the direction of change for the measured value during the titrant addition. If the starting potential, end point and tendency are inconsistent at the start of the analysis, the system will terminate the analysis immediately.(For "end-point type" = "absolute" only.)

Positive | Negative | None

End point value The defined titration end point. The unit will depend on the sensor used.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band") | Formula | Auxiliary value

Control band This number defines the width of the control band. Outside the control band, the system will titrate with the maximum dispensing rate. The smaller the control band, the faster the titrator will react to a deviation from the potential of the defined end point. When the measurement curve reaches the control band, the titrator will slow down the titrant addition to approach the end point in a cautious manner. The unit will depend on the sensor used.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band") | Auxiliary value

Dosing rate (max) The maximum dosing rate, in [mL/min], outside the control band. 0.001 … 60

Dosing rate (min) The minimum dosing rate, in [µL/min], outside the control band. 1 … 10000

Term

inat

ion

At EP Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching the end point.If "no" is selected, after reaching the end point the system will continue acquiring measured values without adding titrant until the maximum time period is reached.

Yes | No

Termination delay The termination delay which defines the time period, in [sec], be-tween reaching the end point and terminating the titration. If during the termination delay the measured value drops below the end point, the system will add further increments and restart the termination delay.(Only if "at EP" = "yes" is selected.)

0 … 100000000 | Auxiliary value

At Vmax The titration will be terminated no later than at this dispensed maxi-mum volume, in [mL].

0 … 100000000

Max. time Defines the maximum time of the titration, in [sec]. 0 … 100000000 | ∞ | Auxiliary value

Methods

108 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Acco

mpa

nyin

g st

atin

g

For T70/T90 only.In the case of titration accompanied by stating, the method function "Stating" is used as a subfunction.The settings correspond to those for the method function "Stating" and can therefore be found in the description of the method function "Stating".Titration accompanied by stating allows a sample solution to be maintained at a specific electrode potential during EQP, EP or two-phase titration. This is a stating that runs parallel to the actual titration and differs from the "Stating" method function as follows:• The accompanying stating begins and ends with the "Main" method function (titration) and therefore does not include

the subfunction "Termination".• The accompanying stating does not include the settings "Stirring", and "Saving Measured Values".• The subfunctions "Predispensing" and "Pretitration" are conducted prior to the main method function.• As soon as the subfunctions "Predispensing" and "Pretitration" have been concluded, the main method function

begins, in which the stating continues to run parallel for the duration of the titration.• Temperature acquisition is specified in the main method function.

Con

ditio

n

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condition is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will deter-mine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 109

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Titration (2-phase) Yes No

Description:

Conducts a two-phase titration simultaneously with the EQP titration. However, mix and separation times can also be in-cluded.

Subfunction | Setting: Explanation: Value range

Titra

nt

Titrant The titrant to be used for the titration. Titrant list in Setup

Concentration The concentration of the selected titrant, in [mol/L]. This number is acquired from the titrant list and cannot be edited. (Info field)

Titrant list in Setup

Sens

or

Type The type of sensor to be used to perform the measurement. mV | pH | Phototrode | Conductivity

Sensor The name of the sensor. Sensor list of the sensor type selected in Setup

Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will depend on the sensor type selected.

Depending on the selected sensor:mV | pH | %T | A | µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS

Tem

pera

ture

acq

uisi

- Temperature acquisi-tion

Defines whether to record the temperature, with the aid of a tempera-ture sensor, during the execution of the analysis function.

Yes | No

Temperature sensor Defines which temperature sensor to use for the temperature acqui-sition. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

List of the temperature sensors in Setup

Unit The temperature unit you want to use. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

°C | K | °F

Stir

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0 … 100

Methods

110 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Pred

ispe

nsin

g

Mode Specifies the type of addition:• Volume: predispenses a specific volume.• Potential: system predispenses a substance until a certain

potential is reached.• Factor: predispenses a multiple (defined in "Factor") of the

sample size.• None: No predispensing.

Volume | Potential | Factor | None

Volume The volume, in [mL], to be predispensed.(For "mode" = "volume" only.)

0.0001 … 1000 | Aux-iliary value | Formula

Potential The potential at which you want to stop predispensing. The unit will depend on the sensor used.(For "mode" = "potential" only.)

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Factor The system calculates the predispensing volume by multiplying the factor by the sample size.(For "mode" = "factor" only.)

0 … 100000 | Auxiliary value | Formula

Wait time Defines a waiting time, in [sec]. (Either after the predispensing or, if "predispensing" was set to "none", before the start of titration.)

0 … 32000

Con

trol

Titrant addition Defines whether to always dispense the same volume defined by dV ("incremental") or to adjust the volume to be titrated per step as the titration progresses ("dynamic").

Dynamic | Incremental

dE(target) Defines the potential difference per titrant addition.(For dynamic titrant addition only)

[mV/µA] 0.1 … 100 [mS/µS] 0.01 … 100

dT(target value) Defines the temperature difference per titrant addition for a tem-perature sensor.(For dynamic titrant addition and use of a temperature sensor only)

0.1 … 100

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 111

Con

trol

dV(min) Defines the minimum amount for a titrant addition, in [mL]. (For dynamic titrant addition only)

0.0001 … 1

dV(max) Defines the maximum amount for a titrant addition, in [mL]. (For dynamic titrant addition only)

0.0001 … 10

dV Defines the volume increment, in [mL], for the incremental titrant addition. (For incremental titrant addition only)

0.0001 … 10

Meas. val. acquisition Type of measuring value acquisition:Equilibrium-controlled: The system acquires the measured value and makes the next titrant addition as soon as a stable measured value is established.Fixed time: The measured values acquisition and titrant addition occur according to fixed time intervals.

Equilibrium-controlled | Fixed time

Mix time Defines the stirring time at the speed defined under "Stir", in [sec]. 0 … 10000

dE As soon as the change in the measured value during the time period dt is less than dE, the measured value will be acquired. Acquisition takes place no earlier than after t(min) and no later than after t(max). Then the next titrant addition is conducted.(For equilibrium-controlled measured value acquisition only)

[mV/µA] 0.1 … 15 [mS/µS] 0.01 … 15

dt (Separation time) Defines the time interval for calculating dE/dt.(For equilibrium-controlled measured value acquisition only)

0.1 … 15

t(min) (Separation time)

Earliest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec].(For equilibrium-controlled measured value acquisition only)

0.5 … 150

t(max) (Separation time)

Latest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec].(For equilibrium-controlled measured value acquisition only)

1 … 100000

Speed (S. time) The speed during the separation time, in [%]. 1 … 100

Separation time Parameter for the next increment addition. The separation time, in [sec], regulates the time period available for the separation of the two phases. (For "measured value acquisition" = "fixed time" only.)

0 … 10000

Methods

112 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Eval

uatio

n an

d re

cogn

ition

Procedure Defines which evaluation procedure to use. Standard | Asymmetric | Minimum | Maximum | Segmented

Threshold Defines the threshold (absolute amount) that must be exceeded for the recognition of an EQP.This threshold references the original curve for the "Minimum" and "Maximum" evaluation procedures, the first derivation of the original curve for "Standard" and "Asymmetrical", and the second derivation of the original curve for "Segmented".

Standard | Asymmetric | Segmented:0 … 1000000Minimum | Maximum: (See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Tendency Defines the tendency for which the EQP is to be detected.(For "evaluation procedures" = "standard" or "Asymmetric" only)

Positive | Negative | None

Ranges You can define up to three recognition ranges. Outside these ranges, the system will recognize neither EQPs nor EQP candidates.Depending on what is defined here, upper and lower limits will be defined for each recognition range and also whether additional EQP criteria are to be used for each recognition range.

1 | 2 | 3 | 0

Lower limit 1-3 Defines the lower limit for the recognition range. Does not appear if "0" was selected for "ranges". The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Upper limit 1-3 Defines the upper limit for the recognition range. Does not appear if "0" was selected for "ranges". The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Add. EQP criteria Defines whether to take additional EQP criteria into consideration. The available selection will depend on the evaluation procedure chosen. They can be defined individually for each recognition range or for the overall recognition range ("recognition ranges" = "0").• Last EQP: The system only considers the quantity of EQPs defined

under "Last jumps".• Steepest jump: The system only considers the quantity of steepest

jumps defined under "Steepest jumps".• Lowest value The system only considers the quantity of lowest

values defined under "Lowest values".• Highest value The system only considers the quantity of highest

values defined under "Highest values".

Last EQP | Steepest jump | Lowest value | Highest value | No

Last jumps The quantity of last jumps to be taken into consideration. (For "add. EQP criteria" = "last EQP" only.)

1 … 9

Steepest jumps The quantity of steepest jumps to be taken into consideration. (For "add. EQP criteria" = "steepest jump" only.)

1 … 9

Lowest values The quantity of lowest values to be taken into consideration. (For "add. EQP criteria" = "lowest value" only.)

1 … 9

Highest values The quantity of highest values to be taken into consideration. (For "add. EQP criteria" = "highest value" only.)

1 … 9

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 113

Term

inat

ion

At Vmax Defines the maximum volume, in [mL], at which the titration must be terminated if it has not been terminated already.

0.1 … 1000

At potential Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching a defined potential (with the correct tendency!).

Yes | No

Potential The potential at which to terminate the titration. The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.(For "at potential" = "yes" only.)

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Termination tendency Defines for which tendency the titration should be terminated. (For "at potential" = "yes" only.)

Positive | Negative | None

At slope Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching a defined slope. This absolute value must be exceeded by one measured value and then be greater than two measured values to result in termination.

Yes | No

Slope The slope, in [unit of measure/mL], at which to terminate the titra-tion.(For "at slope" = "yes" only.)

0 … 100000

After number of recognized EQPs

Specifies whether the titration should be terminated after the recognition of a specific quantity of EQP candidates.The EQP candidates must:- be within the recognition range,- be over the threshold, and- exhibit the correct tendency.

Yes | No

Number of EQPs Defines the quantity of EQP candidates after the recognition of which the system should terminate the titration.(For "after number of EQP candidates" = "yes" only.)

1 … 30

Combined termination criteria

No: Termination as soon as the first of the selected criteria from the [Potential | Slope | Number of EQP candidates] group has been fulfilled.Yes: Termination as soon as all the selected criteria have been fulfilled.Termination of the titration in any case if the maximum volume is reached.

Yes | No

Con

ditio

n

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condition is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will de-termine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

114 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Titration (EQP detection) Yes No

Description:

The learning Titration (EQP) serves to record the optimal settings for processing an EQP titration. As soon as the settings have been successfully recorded, the titration detection in the method is converted to a normal EQP titration with the recorded settings.

Subfunction | Setting: Explanation: Value range

Titra

nt

Titrant The titrant to be used for the titration. Titrant list in Setup

Concentration The concentration of the selected titrant, in [mol/L]. This number is acquired from the titrant list and cannot be edited. (Info field)

Titrant list in Setup

Sens

or

Type The type of sensor to be used to perform the measurement. mV | pH | ISE | Pho-totrode | Polarized| Tem-perature | Conductivity

Sensor The name of the sensor. Sensor list of the sensor type selected in Setup

Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will depend on the sensor type selected.

Depending on the selected sensor:mV | pH | pM | pX | ppm | %T | A | µA | °C | K | °F | µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS

Ion charge The ion charge of an ISE sensor. (Info field) Sensor setup

Indication Defines how to do the indication. Depending on the unit of measure: [mV] = voltametric, [µA] = amperometric. (Info field for polarized sensors.)

Voltametric | Ampero-metric

Ipol Ipol is the polarization current, in [µA], for a voltametric indica-tion.(Only for polarized sensors with "indication" = "voltametric".)

0.0 … 24.0

Upol Upol is the polarization voltage, in [mV], for an amperometric in-dication. (Only for polarized sensors with "indication" = "ampero-metric".)

0 … 2000.0

Tem

pera

ture

acq

uisi

- Temperature acquisi-tion

Defines whether to record the temperature, with the aid of a tempera-ture sensor, during the execution of the analysis function.

Yes | No

Temperature sensor Defines which temperature sensor to use for the temperature acqui-sition. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

List of the temperature sensors in Setup

Unit The temperature unit you want to use. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

°C | K | °F

Stir

Speed [%] The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0 … 100

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 115

Con

ditio

nCondition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this

condition is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will de-termine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

116 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Stating Yes No

Description:

Stating serves to maintain a sample solution at a specific target potential.

Subfunction | Setting: Explanation: Value range

Titra

nt

Titrant The titrant to be used for the titration. Titrant list in Setup

Concentration The concentration of the selected titrant, in [mol/L]. This number is acquired from the titrant list and cannot be edited. (Info field)

Titrant list in Setup

Continuous addition Continuous addition requires a second burette and a second drive with the same titrant. If the first burette empties and is refilled, the second burette will continue dispensing seamlessly.(not with T50)

Yes | No

Titrant 2 The second titrant to be used for the continuous addition. (Only if "con-tinuous addition" is selected.) (not with T50)

Titrant list in Setup

Concentration 2 The concentration of the second titrant, in [mol/L]. This number is ac-quired from the titrant list and cannot be edited. (Info field)(not with T50)

Titrant list in Setup

Sens

or

Type The type of sensor to be used to perform the measurement. mV | pH

Sensor The name of the sensor. Sensor list of the sensor type selected in Setup

Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will depend on the sensor type selected.

Depending on the selected sensor:mV | pH

Tem

pera

ture

acq

uisi

tion Temperature acquisi-

tionDefines whether to record the temperature, with the aid of a temperature sensor, during the execution of the analysis function.

Yes | No

Temperature sensor Defines which temperature sensor to use for the temperature acquisition. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

List of the tempera-ture sensors in Setup

Unit The temperature unit you want to use. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

°C | K | °F

Stir

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0 … 100

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 117

Pret

itrat

ion

Pretitration Specifies whether pretitration should be conducted. Pretitration takes place until the target potential defined in the subfunction "control" is reached.

Yes | No

Control band This number defines the width of the control band. Outside the control band, the system will titrate with the maximum dispensing rate. The smaller the control band, the faster the titrator will react to a deviation from the potential of the defined end point. When the measurement curve reaches the control band, the titrator will slow down the titrant addition to approach the end point in a cautious manner. The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used. (Appears only if "Pretitration" = "yes" was selected.)

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band") | Auxiliary value

Pred

ispe

nsin

g

Mode Specifies the type of addition:• Volume: predispenses a specific volume.• Potential: system predispenses a substance until a certain poten-

tial is reached.• Factor: predispenses a multiple (defined in "Factor") of the sample

size.• None: No predispensing.

Volume | Potential | Factor | None

Volume The volume, in [mL], to be predispensed.(For "mode" = "volume" only.)

0.0001 … 1000 | Auxiliary value | Formula

Potential The potential at which you want to stop predispensing. The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.(For "mode" = "potential" only.)

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band")

Factor The system calculates the predispensing volume by multiplying the factor by the sample size.(For "mode" = "factor" only.)

0 … 100000 | Aux-iliary value | Formula

Wait time Defines a waiting time, in [sec]. (Either after the predispensing or, if "predispensing" was set to "none", before the start of titration.)

0 … 32000

Con

trol

Target potential Defines the target potential at which the sample solution should be kept as constantly as possible. The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band")

Control band This number defines the width of the control band. Outside the control band, the system will titrate with the maximum dispensing rate. The smaller the control band, the faster the titrator will react to a deviation from the target potential. When the measurement curve reaches the con-trol band, the titrator will slow down the titrant addition to approach the target potential in a cautious manner. The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band") | Auxiliary value

Tendency Defines the direction in which the sensor signal should be shifted by the titrant addition.

Positive | Negative

Dosing rate (max) The maximum dosing rate, in [mL/min], outside the control band. 0.001 … 60

Dosing rate (min) The minimum dosing rate, in [µL/min], outside the control band. 1 … 10000

Methods

118 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Mon

itorin

g

Monitoring Defines whether to monitor the sensor signal or temperature during the main stating process (not during pretitration or predispensing!).

Yes | No

Signal If you want to run monitoring, this is where you specify whether to moni-tor the sensor signal or the temperature.(For "monitor" = "yes" only.)

Sensor signal | Tem-perature

Lower limit Defines the lower limit of the range within which the signal or temperature will be allowed to vary. If the signal or temperature violate this range, that will trigger the defined "Action". The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band")

Upper limit Defines the upper limit of the range within which the signal or tempera-ture will be allowed to vary. If the signal or temperature violate this range, that will trigger the defined "Action". The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band")

Action Defines an action for violations of the upper or lower monitoring pa-rameters.• "Terminate": Stating will be terminated.• "Manual": The stating will be interrupted and a message will ap-

pear on the display. The user can terminate or continue the stating process.

• "Automatic": Stating will be interrupted and continued when the monitoring parameters have returned to within the limits.

Automatic | Manual | Terminate

Term

inat

ion

At Vmax The volume, in [mL], after the dispensing of which the stating will be terminated.

0.01 … 1000

From t(min) Specifies whether to define a time for the earliest possible termination of the stating.

Yes | No

t(min) The earliest time, in [min], at which termination can take place, if the maximum volume has not yet been reached.(Only if "from t(min)" = "yes" is selected.)

0.1 … 1000000

At t(max) Specifies whether to define a time at which the stating will be terminated if it has not ended already.

Yes | No

t(max) The time, in [min], at which the stating will be terminated if it has not ended already.(Only if "from t(max)" = "yes" is selected.)

0.1 … 1000000

After stating duration Specifies whether to define a time period after which the stating will be terminated after reaching the end point for the first time.

Yes | No

Stating duration The time period, in [min], after which the stating will be terminated after reaching the first end point. If defined, "t(min)" will be taken into consideration.(Only if "after stating duration" = "yes" is selected.)

0.1 … 1000000

At minimum rate Defines whether to take a minimum rate into consideration which will terminate the stating if violated.

Yes | No

dV The volume increment, in [mL/dt], for calculating the minimum rate.(Only if "at minimal rate" = "yes" is selected.)

0.0001 … 10

dt The time increment, in [min], for calculating the minimum rate.(Only if "at minimal rate" = "yes" is selected.)

1 … 1000000

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 119

Savi

ng m

easu

red

valu

esInterval Defines the interval, in [sec], at which the date should be saved. 1 … 1000000

Start condition Defines the starting condition for saving the data:• None: The system will start saving the data immediately.• Potential: The system will start saving data after reaching a spe-

cific potential.• After pretitration: The system will start saving the data after the

pretitration.• After predispensing: The system will start saving the data after the

predispensing.

None | Potential | After pretitration | After predispensing

Potential Defines the starting potential for saving the data. The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used. (For "starting condition" = "potential" only.)

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band") | Formula | Auxiliary value

Con

ditio

n

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condi-tion is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will determine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcu-lation. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

120 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Method function: Withinloop::

Outside of loop:

Dispense (controlled) Yes No

Description:

Controlled dispensing monitors dosing. With this function the potential or temperature of the sample solution is continuously monitored, and occurrences of violations of the predefined criteria are recorded.

Subfunction | Setting: Explanation: Value range

Titra

nt

Titrant The titrant to be dispensed. Titrant list in Setup

Concentration The concentration of the selected titrant, in [mol/L]. This number is acquired from the titrant list and cannot be edited. (Info field)

Titrant list in Setup

Continuous addition Continuous addition requires a second burette and a second drive with the same titrant. If the first burette empties and is refilled, the second burette will continue dispensing seamlessly. (not with T50)

Yes | No

Titrant 2 The second titrant to be used for the continuous addition. (Only if "continuous addition" is selected.)(not with T50)

Titrant list in Setup

Concentration 2 The concentration of the second titrant, in [mol/L]. This number is acquired from the titrant list and cannot be edited. (Info field)(not with T50)

Titrant list in Setup

Sens

or

Type The type of sensor to be used to perform the measurement. (Info field if the method function is used within a calibration loop.)

mV | pH

Sensor The name of the sensor. Sensor list of the sensor type selected in Setup

Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will depend on the sensor type selected.

Depending on the selected sensor:mV | pH

Tem

pera

ture

acq

uisi

tion Temperature acquisi-

tionDefines whether to record the temperature, with the aid of a tempera-ture sensor, during the execution of the analysis function.

Yes | No

Temperature sensor Defines which temperature sensor to use for the temperature acquisi-tion. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

List of the temperature sensors in Setup

Unit The temperature unit you want to use. (Only if "yes" was selected for "temperature acquisition".)

°C | K | °F

Stir

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0 … 100

Dis

pens

e

Volume The volume to be dispensed, in [mL]. 0.001 … 1000 | Auxil-iary value | Formula

Dosing rate The dosing speed, in [mL/min]. If the number is above the maximum value possible, the system will dispense at the maximum rate. You can also select a burette type-dependent maximum number.

0.001 … 60

t(max) Defines a time period, in [min], after which dispensing will be termi-nated, even if the volume has not yet been reached.

0.1 … 1000000

Methods

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 121

Mon

itorin

gMonitoring Defines whether to monitor the sensor signal or temperature during

the main dispensing process.Yes | No

Signal If you want to run monitoring, you can specify here whether to moni-tor the sensor signal or the temperature. "Temperature" can only be selected if "temperature acquisition" = "yes" was selected.(For "monitor" = "yes" only.)

Sensor signal | Tem-perature

Lower limit Defines the lower limit of the range within which the signal or tem-perature will be allowed to vary. If the signal or temperature violate this range, that will trigger the defined "Action". The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used. (For "monitor" = "yes" only.)

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Upper limit Defines the upper limit of the range within which the signal or tem-perature will be allowed to vary. If the signal or temperature violate this range, that will trigger the defined "Action". The unit of measure will depend on the sensor used. (For "monitor" = "yes" only.)

(See "4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measur-ing Units and Control Band")

Action Defines an action for violations of the upper or lower monitoring parameters.• "Terminate": Dispensing will be terminated.• "Manual": Dispensing will be terminated and a message will

appear on the display. The user can terminate or continue dispensing, providing the monitoring parameters have returned to within the limits.

• "Automatic": Dispensing will be terminated and restarted when the monitoring parameters have returned to within the limits.

(For "monitor" = "yes" only.)

Automatic | Manual | Terminate

Savi

ng m

easu

red

valu

es Interval Defines the interval, in [sec], for saving the measured values. 0.1 … 1000000

Con

ditio

n

Condition Here you can enter a condition in the form of a calculation. If this condition is true, the system will execute the method function. If this condition is not true, the method function will not be executed.(For T90 only)

Yes | No

Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will deter-mine the execution of the method function. The method function will only be executed if the result is "true".(Appears only for T90 if "specification" = "yes" was selected.)

Mathematical calcula-tion. (See "9. Analysis and Calculation")

Methods

122 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

4.8 Value Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band

Sensor type Measuring unit

Value range Value range EP relative Value rangeControl band

mV Sensor mV -2000 … 2000 -4000.0 … 4000.0 0.1 … 4000

pH pH -100 … 100 -100.00 … 100.00 0.01 … 100

mV -2000 … 2000 -4000.0 … 4000.0 0.1 … 4000

ISE pM | pX -100 … 100 -100.00 … 100.00 0.01 … 100

ppm 0 … 1000000 -10000000.000 … 10000000.000 0.001 … 10000000

mV -2000 … 2000 -4000.0 … 4000.0 0.1 … 4000

Phototrode %T 0.001 … 100 -1000.0 … 1000.0 0.1 … 1000

a 0 … 5 -1000000.00 … 1000000.00 0.01 … 1000000

mV -2000 … 2000 -4000.0 … 4000.0 0.1 … 4000

Polarized sensor mV 0 … 2000 -2000.0 … 2000.0 0.1 … 2000

µA 0 … 220 -220.0 … 220.0 0.1 … 220

Temperature °C -20 … 200 -220.0 … 220.0 0.1 … 220.0

k 253.2 … 473.2 -220.0 … 220.0 0.1 … 220.0

°F -4 … 392 -396.0 … 396.0 0.1 … 396.0

Conductivity µS/cm 0 … 1000000 -1000000.000 … 1000000.000 0.001 … 1000000

mS/cm 0 … 1000000 -1000000.000 … 1000000.000 0.001 … 1000000

µS 0 … 100000000 -1000000.000 … 1000000.000 0.001 … 1000000

mS 0 … 100000000 -1000000.000 … 1000000.000 0.001 … 1000000

Manual

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 123

5. Manual operations (Manual)

With the help of the manual operations, you can call up various titrator functions that do not depend on the immediate execution of an analysis but that may be helpful during sample preparation, for example.The following manual operations can be called up from here with their corresponding titrator compo-nents:

Hardware components

Possible manual operations Possible usages

Stirrer Stir Dissolve a solid sample

Sensor Measure Determine the pH or temperature of a solution

Burette Rinse burette Rinse burette before changing a titrant

Dispense Dispense during sample preparation

Manual titration Manual titration using a color indicator

Pump Pump Pump auxiliary reagents in or out, drain sample containers

Auxiliary instru-ment

Control auxiliary instrument Check an external pump

Sample Changer

Rondo: Move to position Prepare an analysis

Rondo: Move titration head

Rondo: Pump

Rondo: Rinse

• With the T70 and T90 models, you can perform a maximum of six manual operations simultane-ously (with one hardware component each), if your power consumption permits that.

• Remember that with the T70 and T90 you will not be able to start another manual operation if a manual titration is being executed.

• The T50 model does not allow parallel execution of multiple manual operations.• Manual operations can also be executed while an analysis is running, if the hardware components

that you want to operate manually are not going to be used by the analysis and if the power con-sumption permits it. (T70 and T90 only)

• The resources parameters in all editable fields can be changed temporarily (only for the execution of the manual operation in question) and can vary from the setup settings. The changes made will not be copied over to the setup, however.

Manual

124 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

5.1 Stirrer

To switch one of the connected stirrers (overhead or magnetic stirrer) on or off for a definable period of time with a definable stirrer speed, select:

Home > Manual > Stirrer

- Select a titration stand.- Select the stirrer output connected to the stirrer that you want to start up.- Enter the speed in [%].- Enter the stirring period in [sec] or select for an unlimited stirring period.- Press "Start".- You can press "Stop" to stop the stirrer at any time (terminating the manual operation).

The following parameters are available for the manual operation "Stirrer":

Parameters Explanation Value range

Titration stand The titration stand whose stirrer is to be switched on.

Titration stand list

Stirrer output The stirrer output to which the stirrer is connected. MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER | In-ternal stirrer (other options will depend on setup)

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0% to stop, 100% for maximum speed.

0 … 100

Stir time The stirring time, in [sec], during which the stirrer should be in operation. You can select "∞" for an unlimited stirring time.

0 … 10000 | ∞

• Changes made in this menu will only be applied to the manual operation "Stirrer" and will have no effect on the settings made in the setup.

5.2 SENSOR

To run a measurement with any connected sensor, select:

Home > Manual > Sensor

- Select the sensor you want to use from the list of sensors defined in the setup.- Select the stirrer output for the stirrer and enter a speed.- For polarized, potentiometric and conductivity sensors, specify whether the temperature should be

entered manually or automatically (with the aid of a temperature sensor). - For manual temperature acquisition, enter the temperature. - For automatic temperature acquisition, select a connected temperature sensor and the temperature

unit you want to use.- Enter the period for the measurement in [sec].- Select whether to output a record on the printer.- If you want to output a record on the printer, use dt [sec] to define the time interval between mea-

surements.- Select "Start" to start the measurement.- You can select "Stop" to terminate the procedure at any time.

Manual

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 125

During the measurement, the system will display the online curve (measured values in the selected unit versus time). You can also use the "Measured values" softkey to display a table of measured values instead of the curve.

The following parameters are available, depending on the type of sensor selected:

5.2.1 Temperature sensor

Parameters Explanation Value range

Sensor Here you can select the sensor. Sensor list

Sensor input Defines the input to which the sensor is connected. AB1/PT1000 (other op-tions will depend on setup)

Unit The measurement unit you want to use for the mea-surement (°C | K | °F).

°C | K | °F

Titration stand The titration stand whose stirrer is to be switched on.

Titration stand list

Stirrer output The stirrer output to which the stirrer is connected. MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER | In-ternal stirrer (other options will depend on setup)

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0% to stop, 100% for maximum speed.

0 … 100

Duration The measurement and stirring period, in [sec]. You can select "∞" for an unlimited measurement period.

0 … 10000 |

Record If "Yes" is selected for "Record", every dt seconds a measured value bundle will be output to the printer.

No | Yes

dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for outputting measured value bundles to the printer. (Only ap-pears if "Record" = "Yes" was selected.)

1 … 6000

• Changes made in this menu will only be applied to the manual operation "Sensor" and will have no effect on the settings made in the setup.

5.2.2 Potentiometric Sensor

Parameters Explanation Value range

Sensor Here you can select the sensor. Sensor list

Sensor input Defines the input to which the sensor is connected. AB1/SENSOR1 | AB1/SEN-SOR2 (other options will depend on setup)

Ion charge The ion charge of the ions that can be detected with an ISE sensor. (Appears for ISE sensors only.) (Info field)

-3 | -2 | -1 | 0 | +1 | +2 | +3 |

Unit The unit you want to use for the measurement. Depends on the sensor se-lected:mV | pH | pM | pX | ppm | %T | A

Manual

126 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Titration stand The titration stand whose stirrer is to be switched on.

Titration stand list

Stirrer output The stirrer output to which the stirrer is connected. MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER | In-ternal stirrer (other options will depend on setup)

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0% to stop, 100% for maximum speed.

0 … 100

Temperature manual

Defines whether to enter the temperature manually ("yes") or via a temperature sensor ("no").

No | Yes

Temperature If the temperature is entered manually, you can enter it here, in [°C].(Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "Yes" was selected.)

-20 … 200

Temperature sensor

You can select the temperature sensor here. (Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "No" was selected.)

Sensor list

Sensor input Defines the input to which the sensor is connected. (Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "No" was selected.)

AB1/PT1000 (other op-tions will depend on setup)

Temperature unit The unit of measure for the temperature measure-ment (°C | K | °F). (Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "No" was selected.)

°C | K | °F

Duration The measurement and stirring period, in [sec]. You can select "∞" for an unlimited measurement period.

0 … 10000 |

Record If "Yes" is selected for "Record", every dt seconds a measured value bundle will be output to the printer.

No | Yes

dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for outputting measured value bundles to the printer. (Only ap-pears if "Record" = "Yes" was selected.)

1 … 6000

• The parameters for temperature acquisition or entering the temperature, "Temperature manual", "Temperature", "Temperature sensor", "Sensor input" and "Temperature unit" are omitted for mV sen-sors and the phototrode.

• Changes made in this menu will only be applied to the manual operation "Sensor" and will have no effect on the settings made in the setup.

5.2.3 Polarized Sensor

Parameters Explanation Value range

Sensor Here you can select the sensor. Sensor list

Sensor input Defines the input to which the sensor is connected. AB1/SENSOR2 (other options will depend on setup)

Indication Defines how to do the indication. Depending on the unit of measure: [mV] = voltametric, [µA] = amperometric.

Voltametric | Amperometric

Ipol Ipol is the polarization current, in [µA], for a volta-metric indication.(Only for "Indication" = "Voltametric".)

0.0 … 24

Manual

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 127

Upol Upol is the polarization voltage, in [mV], for an amperometric indication. (Only for "Indication" = "Amperometric".)

0.0 … 2000

Titration stand The titration stand whose stirrer is to be switched on.

Titration stand list

Stirrer output The stirrer output to which the stirrer is connected. MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER | In-ternal stirrer (other options will depend on setup)

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0% to stop, 100% for maximum speed.

0 … 100

Temperature manual

Defines whether to enter the temperature manually ("yes") or via a temperature sensor ("no").

No | Yes

Temperature If the temperature is entered manually, you can enter it here, in [°C].(Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "Yes" was selected.)

-20 … 200

Temperature sensor

You can select the temperature sensor here. (Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "No" was selected.)

Sensor list

Sensor input Defines the input to which the sensor is connected. (Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "No" was selected.)

AB1/PT1000 (other op-tions will depend on setup)

Temperature unit The unit of measure for the temperature measure-ment (°C | K | °F). (Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "No" was selected.)

°C | K | °F

Duration The measurement and stirring period, in [sec]. You can select "∞" for an unlimited measurement period.

0 … 10000 | ∞

Record If "Yes" is selected for "Record", every dt seconds a measured value bundle will be output to the printer.

No | Yes

dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for outputting measured value bundles to the printer. (Appears if "Record" = "Yes" was selected only.)

1 … 6000

• Changes made in this menu will only be applied to the manual operation "Sensor" and will have no effect on the settings made in the setup.

Manual

128 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

5.2.4 Conductivity Sensor

Parameters Explanation Value range

Sensor Here you can select the sensor. Sensor list

Sensor input Defines the input to which the sensor is connected. CB1/SENSOR1 (other options will depend on setup)

Unit The unit you want to use for the measurement. µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS

Titration stand The titration stand whose stirrer is to be switched on.

Titration stand list

Stirrer output The stirrer output to which the stirrer is connected. MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER | In-ternal stirrer (other options will depend on setup)

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0% to stop, 100% for maximum speed.

0 … 100

Temperature manual

Defines whether to enter the temperature manually ("yes") or via a temperature sensor ("no").

No | Yes

Temperature If the temperature is entered manually, you can enter it here, in [°C].(Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "Yes" was selected.)

-20 … 200

Temperature sensor

You can select the temperature sensor here. (Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "No" was selected.)

Sensor list

Sensor input Defines the input to which the sensor is connected. (Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "No" was selected.)

AB1/PT1000 (other op-tions will depend on setup)

Temperature unit The unit of measure for the temperature measure-ment (°C | K | °F). (Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "No" was selected.)

°C | K | °F

Duration The measurement and stirring period, in [sec]. You can select "∞" for an unlimited measurement period.

0 … 10000 | ∞

Record If "Yes" is selected for "Record", every dt seconds a measured value bundle will be output to the printer.

No | Yes

dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for output-ting measured value bundles to the printer. (Only appears if "Record" = "Yes" was selected.)

1 … 6000

• Changes made in this menu will only be applied to the manual operation "Sensor" and will have no effect on the settings made in the setup.

Manual

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 129

5.3 Burette

In the Burette menu you can execute various manual operations with available burettes.To rinse an available Burette, dispense a defined quantity of titrant or run a manual titration with a selected burette, select:

Home > Manual > Burette

5.3.1 Rinse burette

The "Rinse burette" operation lets you rinse a burette and its connecting tubes and fill it with fresh titrant, for example if you want to remove air bubbles from the system.Select:

Home > Manual > Burette > Rinse

- Select the titrant you want to rinse with.- Select the drive on which the titrant is installed. (For PnP burettes, the system automatically selects

the appropriate drive.)- Enter the number of cycles you want to run.- Enter the output volume in [%] to define the percentage of the burette's total volume that you want

to output during each rinse passage.- Enter the filling rate in [%] to define the speed at which you want to refill the burette. (100% is the

maximum speed.)- Press "Start" to start the rinse procedure.- You can select "Stop" to terminate the procedure at any time.

• For reagents with a higher viscosity or volatile reagents, we recommend reducing the filling rate to prevent air from being drawn in and the titrant from outgassing.

• Make sure there is always an adequately sized container under the dispensing tube for rinse proce-dures.

The following parameters are available for the manual operation "Rinse burette":

Parameters Explanation Value range

Titrant You can select the titrant from the titrant list here. Titrant list

Concentration The concentration of the selected titrant. (Info field) Titrant list

Drive The drive on which the burette with the selected titrant is installed.

1 … 8

Cycles Defines the number of rinse cycles to be executed. 1 … 100

Discharge volume The volume of titrant, in [mL], to be discharged dur-ing the rinsing process.

10 … 100

Fill rate Defines the filling rate, in [%], at which to fill the burette. (100% is the maximum filling rate.)

30 … 100

Manual

130 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

5.3.2 Dispense

The "Dispense" operation lets you manually dispense a defined quantity of titrant.

Select:

Home > Manual > Burette > Dispense

- Select the titrant you would like to dispense.- Select the drive on which the titrant is installed. (For PnP burettes, the system automatically selects

the appropriate drive.)- Enter the volume to be dispensed in [mL].- Enter the filling rate in [%] to define the speed at which you want to refill the burette. (100% is the

maximum speed.)- Press "Start" to start the dispensing procedure.- You can select "Stop" to terminate the procedure at any time.

The following parameters are available for the manual operation "Dispense":

Parameters Explanation Value range

Titrant You can select the titrant from the titrant list here. Titrant list

Concentration The concentration of the selected titrant. (Info field) Titrant list

Drive The drive on which the burette with the selected titrant is installed.

1 … 8

Burette volume The volume of the burette used, in [mL]. 1 | 5 | 10 | 20

Volume The volume to be dispensed, in [mL]. 0.001 … 100

Fill rate Defines the filling rate, in [%], at which to fill the burette. (100% is the maximum filling rate.)

30 … 100

• The parameter "Burette volume" is displayed as an info field for defined titrants and cannot be edited in those cases.

Manual

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 131

5.3.3 Manual titration

To run a manually controlled titration, select:

Home > Manual > Burette > Manual Titration

- Select the titrant you would like to titrate with.- Select the drive on which the titrant is installed. (For PnP burettes, the system automatically selects

the appropriate drive.)- Enter the filling rate in [%] to define the speed at which you want to refill the burette. (100% is the

maximum speed.)- Select the sensors you would like to use for the measurement from the list of sensors defined in the

setup.- Select the stirrer output for the stirrer and enter a speed.- Specify whether or not you want to run a manual temperature acquisition. - If you do not want automatic temperature acquisition, enter the temperature. - If you want automatic temperature acquisition, select a connected temperature sensor.- Select whether the results should be given in the form of consumption (of the titrant) or content (in

the sample).- Select the measurement unit and the number of decimal places for the results.- For results given as content, select the sample's entry type (volume or weight) and enter the

sample quantity m, the density d (for the volume or weight entry types), the mol mass M and the equivalent number z for the substance to be tested.

- Specify whether a record should be output to the printer and select what elements should be con-tained in that record (results, table of measured values and curve).

- Press "Start" to start the manual titration and move to the online screen.- Press the "Dispense" button once to add a minimum volume of titrant. If you hold down the "Dis-

pense" button, the system will continuously add titrant. The dispensing rate will increase as you hold down the button. After you release the button, the system will titrate at the minimum speed again the next time the button is pressed.

- Press "Exit" to end the manual titration.

During the manual titration, the system will display the measured value, the titrant consumption, and a curve (measured value versus consumption) onscreen.After you finish, a record can automatically be output to the printer. You can also view the results, mea-sured values and curve on the screen.

• For the results of the manual titration, the system takes as a basis the titrant consumption until the conclusion of the titration. The EQP is not calculated!

Manual

132 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

The following parameters are available for the manual operation "Manual titration":

Parameters Explanation Value range

Titrant You can select the titrant from the titrant list here. Titrant list

Concentration The concentration of the selected titrant. (Info field) Titrant list

Drive The drive on which the burette with the selected titrant is installed.

1 … 8

Fill rate Defines the filling rate, in [%], at which to fill the burette. (100% is the maximum filling rate.)

30 … 100

Sensor Here you can select the sensor. Sensor list

Sensor input Defines the input to which the sensor is connected. (Depends on the sensor selected.)

Ion charge The ion charge of the ions that can be detected with an ISE sensor. (Appears for ISE sensors only.) (Info field)

-3 | -2 | -1 | 0 | +1 | +2 | +3 |

Unit The unit you want to use for the measurement. (Does not appear for polarized sensors.)

(Depends on the sensor selected.)

Indication Defines how to do the indication. Depending on the unit of measure: [mV] = voltametric, [µA] = amperometric. (Appears for polarized sensors only.)

Voltametric | Amperometric

Ipol Ipol is the polarization current, in [µA], for a voltametric indication. (Only appears for polarized sensors and "Indication" = "Voltametric".)

0.0 … 24

Upol Upol is the polarization voltage, in [mV], for an am-perometric indication. (Only appears for polarized sensors and "Indication" = "Amperometric".)

0.0 … 2000

Titration stand The titration stand whose stirrer is to be switched on.

Titration stand list

Stirrer output The stirrer output to which the stirrer is connected. MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER | Internal stirrer (other options will depend on setup)

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0% to stop, 100% for maximum speed.

0 … 100

Temperature manual

Defines whether to enter the temperature manually ("yes") or via a temperature sensor ("no").

No | Yes

Temperature If the temperature is entered manually, you can enter it here, in [°C].(Only appears if "Temperature manual" = "Yes" was selected.)

-20 … 200

Temperature sensor

You can select the temperature sensor here. (Only appears when "Temperature acquisition" = "No" was selected.)

Sensor list

Sensor input Defines the input to which the sensor is connected. (Only appears when "Temperature acquisition" = "No" was selected.)

AB1/PT1000 (other op-tions will depend on setup)

Manual

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 133

Temperature unit The unit of measure for the temperature measure-ment (°C | K | °F). (Only appears when "Tempera-ture acquisition" = "No" was selected.)

°C | K | °F

Result Here you can select whether to output the result of the manual titration as the amount of titrant con-sumed or as the content in the sample.

Consumption | Content

Unit The unit for stating the result in the form of the titrant consumption. (Only for "Result" = "Consump-tion".)

mL | mmol

Unit The unit for stating the result as the sample content. (Only for "Result" = "Content".)

mol/L | mol/kg | g/L | g/kg | % | ppm

Decimal places Here you can define the number of decimal places for the result.

1 … 4

Entry type The entry type for the sample size, either "Weight" or "Volume". (Only for "Result" = "Content".)

Weight | Volume

Sample size The sample size, in [mL] or in [g], depending on the entry type selected. (Only for "Result" = "Con-tent".)

0.0001 … 100

Density The density of the sample substance to be deter-mined, in [g/mL]. (Only for "Result" = "Content".)

0.0001 … 100

M The molar mass of the sample substance to be de-termined, in [g/mol]. (Only for "Result" = "Content".)

Substances list

z (Equivalent number)

The equivalent number of the sample to be deter-mined. (Only for "Result" = "Content".)

Substances list

Record Defines whether to output a record to the printer after the titration.

Yes | No

Incl. Results Here you can specify whether the record should contain all the results.(Only appears for "Record" = "Yes".)

Yes | No

Incl. Measured value table

Here you can specify whether the record should contain a table of measured values. (Only appears for "Record" = "Yes".)

Yes | No

Incl. Curve Here you can specify whether the record should contain a curve. (Only appears for "Record" = "Yes".)

Yes | No

• The parameters for temperature acquisition or entering the temperature, "Temperature manual", "Temperature", "Temperature sensor", "Sensor input" and "Temperature unit" are omitted for mV sen-sors and the phototrode.

Manual

134 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

5.4 Pump

You can use the "Pump" operation to use a connected pump to pump any volume of an auxiliary reagent or (depending on the tube connections) to drain a titration vessel.

Home > Manual > Pump

- Select the pump you would like to use and adjust the pumping rate.- Enter the volume in [mL] that you would like to add.- Press "Start" to start the pumping procedure.- You can select "Stop" to terminate the procedure at any time.

The following parameters are available

Parameters Explanation Value range

Auxiliary reagent Here you can select the name of the auxiliary reagent to be dispensed from the list of auxiliary reagents defined in the setup.

Auxiliary reagents list

Pump Here you can select the pump to be used for the dosing from the list of pumps in the setup.

Pump list

Pump rate Defines the pump rate, in [mL/min]. 0.1 … 1000

Pump output The pump output to which the pump is connected. MB/PUMP1 | MB/PUMP2 | AB1/PUMP (other options will depend on setup)

Volume The volume to be dispensed, in [mL]. You can also select "∞" for unlimited pumping.

0 … 1000 | ∞

5.5 Auxiliary Instrument

This menu lets you selectively control the titrator's inputs and outputs. You can transmit outgoing signals and query incoming signals. This lets you check whether the communication is functioning between the titrator and a connected auxiliary instrument (lid handler, dispenser, etc.). In this way, manually triggered auxiliary instrument functions can be used as support for a titration.

Home > Manual > Auxiliary instrument

- Select the control type for the auxiliary instrument.- Select the name of the auxiliary instrument you would like to control.- Enter the specific communication parameters for the control type.- Press "Start" to start the control of the auxiliary instrument.- You can select "Stop" to terminate the procedure at any time.

• Using the manual operation "Auxiliary instrument" and the control type "Stirrer", you can, for example, use a second stirrer simultaneously to a stirrer started by the manual operation "Stirrer". (Only for the T70 and T90)

Manual

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 135

The following parameters are available, depending on the type of auxiliary instrument control:

Parameters Explanation Value range

Control type Here you can select the control type for the auxiliary instrument to be controlled. Additional parameters will be available for each auxiliary instrument, depending on the control type.

Output 24 V | Out TTL (sin-gle pin) | Input TTL (single pin) | Stirrer | RS-232

For "Control type" = "Output 24 V", the following parameters are available:

Parameters Explanation Value range

Name The name of the auxiliary instrument to be con-trolled.

Auxiliary instrument list

Output The output to which the auxiliary instrument is con-nected.

MB/PUMP1 | MB/PUMP2 | AB1/PUMP (other options will depend on setup)

Duration The time, in [sec], the auxiliary instrument should be switched on. You can also select "∞" for unlim-ited time.

0 … 10000 | ∞

• An auxiliary instrument controlled by the control type "Output 24 V" can be switched on and off or operated for a defined period of time.

For "Control type" = "Out TTL (single pin)", the following parameters are available:

Parameters Explanation Value range

Name The name of the auxiliary instrument to be con-trolled.

Auxiliary instrument list

Output The output and the pin to which the auxiliary instru-ment is connected.

MB/TTL Out1 | MB/TTL Out2 | MB/TTL Out3 | B/TTL Out4 (other options will depend on setup)

Mode Defined quantity and type of output TTL signals.• Fixed time: The control outlet is switched on for

the defined time period.• Input controlled: A signal received at the control

input controls the control output. The auxiliary instrument function is ended when the signal at the control inlet changes or after a defined maximum time period has expired.

• Sequential: The control output runs through a defined sequence.

Fixed time | Input con-trolled | Sequential

Duration If "Mode" = "Fixed time" was selected, this is where you can define the time period for the control outlet to be switched on. (Only appears for "Mode" = "Fixed time".)

0 … 10000 |

InputAuxiliary instru-ment

The name of the auxiliary instrument to serve as the signal output (control input).(Only appears for "Mode" = "Input controlled".)

Auxiliary instrument list in the setup

Manual

136 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Input The input where the auxiliary instrument should be queried. (Only appears for "Mode" = "Input con-trolled".)

MB/TTL In1

Max. wait time The maximum waiting time for a signal change.(Only appears for "Mode" = "Input controlled".)

0 … 10000 |

Output signal Normal: The signal is transmitted unchanged.Inverted: The signal is transmitted in inverted form.(Only appears for "Mode" = "Input controlled".)

Normal | Inverted

Number of pulses The number of pulses in the planned sequence. (Only appears for "Mode" = "Sequential".)

0 … 10000

Pulse duration The duration of a pulse, in [sec]. (Only appears for "Mode" = "Sequential".)

0 … 10000

Interval Defines the time period, in [sec], between two impulse starts. (Only appears for "Mode" = "Sequential".)

0 … 10000

• If "Mode" = "Input controlled" was selected, the system checks the incoming input signal until the maximum time expires or a signal is received.

For "Control type" = "Input TTL (single pin)", the following parameters are available:

Parameters Explanation Value range

Name The name of the auxiliary instrument to be controlled. Auxiliary instrument list

Input The input (plug and pin), where you want to query the auxiliary instrument.

MB/TTL In1 | MB/TTL In2 (other options will depend on setup)

Input signal Defines whether the expected input signal should be rising or falling.

Rising | Falling

Max. wait time The maximum waiting time. 0 … 10000 |

• You can use the control type "Input TTL (single pin)" to wait for a rising or falling input signal. The manual operation will be ended as soon as an input signal is received or the maximum waiting time is exceeded.

For "Control type" = "Stirrer", the following parameters are available:

Parameters Explanation Value range

Name The name of the auxiliary instrument to be controlled. Auxiliary instrument list

Speed The speed of the stirrer, in [%]. 0% to stop, 100% for maximum speed.

0 … 100

Output The output to which the auxiliary instrument is con-nected.

MB/STIRRER1 | MB/STIR-RER2 | AB1/STIRRER other options will depend on setup)

Duration The time, in [sec], the auxiliary instrument should be switched on. You can also select "∞" for unlim-ited time.

0 … 10000 |

• An auxiliary instrument controlled by the control type "Stirrer" can be switched on and off or oper-ated for a defined period of time.

Manual

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 137

For "Control type" = "RS-232", the following parameters are available:

Parameters Explanation Value range

Name The name of the auxiliary instrument to be con-trolled.

Auxiliary instrument list

Socket The RS-232 connection you want to use for the auxiliary instrument.

MB/COM1 | MB/COM2 | AB1/COM

Output sequence Defines the output sequence to be transmitted by the titrator.

Arbitrary

Wait for response Here you can define whether the titrator should wait for a response (input sequence) after transmitting the output sequence.

Yes | No

Input sequence Here you can define any input sequence that the titrator should wait for as a response.(Only appears when "Wait for response" = "Yes" was selected.)

Arbitrary

Max. wait time The maximum time the titrator should wait for a response.(Only appears when "Wait for response" = "Yes" was selected.)

0 … 10000 |

• You can use the control type "RS-232" to transmit any signal and (if you so specify) to wait for a response.

Manual

138 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

5.6 Sample changer

You can use the manual operation "Sample changer" to move the titration head of a connected sample changer, drive to a specific position on the rack and use the pump or rinse function on the sample changer.

Home > Manual > Sample changer

- Select the sample changer you want to control.- Select the action you want to execute: "Move titration head", "Move to position", "Rinse" or "Pump".- For "Move to position", enter the position on the rack, the rotation direction and the titration head

position after completion.- For "Move titration head", enter the titration head position to which you want to move the sample

changer's titration head: "Sample", "Rotation" or "Rinse".- Press "Start" to execute the action on the sample changer.- You can select "Stop" to terminate the procedure at any time.

Parameters Explanation Value range

Sample Changer You can select the sample changer here. Rondo60/1A | Rondo60/2A | Rondo60/1B | Rondo60/2B

Action Defines the action to be executed on the sample changer.

Drive to position | Move titration head | Pump | Rinse

When you have selected the sample changer and the action to be executed, the following parameters will be available for the various actions:

Move to position

You can use this function to rotate the rack of a Rondo60 sample changer forwards or backwards to a specific position.

Parameters Explanation Value range

Position Defines the position on the rack to which the system should move.

1 … maximum number of positions on the rack

Direction Specifies whether to rotate the rack forward or backward.

Forwards | Backwards

Titration head position

The vertical position to which the titration head of the sample changer should be brought.

Sample | Rotate | Rinse

Manual

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 139

Move titration head

This is where you can move the sample changer's titration head to one of three possible vertical posi-tions. Select from:

• Sample• Rotate• Rinse

Parameters Explanation Value range

Titration head position

The vertical position to which the titration head of the sample changer should be brought.

Sample | Rotate | Rinse

Pump

You can use the sample changer's pump to pump any volume.

Parameters Explanation Value range

Auxiliary reagent Defines the auxiliary reagent to be added. (This also indirectly defines the pump.)

Auxiliary reagents list.

Pump Here you can select the pump from the list of pumps defined in the setup.

Pump list

Pump rate The pump rate of the pump, in [mL/min]. 0.1 … 1000

Pump output The output to which the pump is connected. MB/PUMP1 | MB/PUMP2 | AB1/PUMP | Rondo60/1A Pump 1 | Rondo60/1A Pump 2 (other options will depend on setup)

Volume The volume to be pumped, in milliliters. 0 … 1000

Rinse

The sensor on a sample changer can be rinsed, with or without draining the rinse liquid.

Parameters Explanation Value range

Auxiliary reagent Defines the auxiliary reagent to be added. (This also indirectly defines the pump.)

Auxiliary reagents defined in the setup.

Pump Here you can select the pump from the list of pumps defined in the setup.

Pump list

Pump rate The pump rate of the pump, in [mL/min]. 0.1 … 1000

Pump output The output to which the pump is connected. MB/PUMP1 | MB/PUMP2 | AB1/PUMP | Rondo60/1A Pump 1 | Rondo60/1A Pump 2 (other options will depend on setup)

Rinse cycles The number of rinse cycles to be run. 1 … 100

Vol. per cycle The volume of auxiliary reagent, in [mL], used per rinse cycle.

0 … 1000

Manual

140 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Position Defines the position on the rack to which the sys-tem should move.

1 … maximum number of positions on the rack

Drain Defines whether to drain the rinse liquid. Yes | No

Drain pump Here you can select a pump for draining the rinse liquid. (Only appears when "Drain" = "Yes" was selected.)

Pump list

Pump rate The pump rate of the drain pump, in [mL/min]. (Only appears when "Drain" = "Yes" was selected.)

0.1 … 1000

Pump output The output to which the drain pump is connected. (Only appears when "Drain" = "Yes" was selected.)

MB/PUMP1 | MB/PUMP2 | AB1/PUMP | Rondo60/1A Pump 1 | Rondo60/1A Pump 2 (other options will depend on setup)

Series

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 141

6. Series templates

Using series templates, you can group multiple (up to 120) individual samples into one sample series, so that all the samples in the series can be analyzed one after the other using a defined method. With the T90, you can also group multiple sample series (up to 20) into one series sequence.

A free sample series lets you decide at the start of each series temple which method you want to use to execute the series. (For normal sample series the method is defined in the series template.)

• You can create a shortcut on the home screen for all the series templates.• The maximum number of sample series you can save in the titrator is 60 (sample series + free

sample series). With the T90 you can save an additional 20 series sequences (maximum).

The list of series templates shows you all the series templates defined in the titrator. Each series template is listed in this list with its type (SAS = sample series, FSS = free sample series, SSQ = series sequence) and its name.If you select a series template from this list by clicking on it, you can change its parameters or delete the entire template.You can use the "New" softkey to create a new series template. The following parameters will be avail-able:

Parameters Explanation Range of options

Type The type of the serial template. Sample series | Series se-quence (only for the T90) | Free sample series

You will be able to set various additional parameters depending on the type selected:

6.1 Sample series

For the "Type" parameter, "Sample series" must be selected.

Parameters Explanation Range of options

Sample series ID Here you can assign any ID to the sample series. Arbitrary

Method ID The ID of the method to be used to run the series. Method list

Comments Any comments. Arbitrary

Loop Only appears if the assigned method contains more than one loop. (Info field)

1 for the T503 for the T706 for the T90

Number of samples

The number of samples for each loop of the Sample type.

1 … 120

Standard The name of the titer standard for a Sample (titer) method function in each loop. (Info field)

List of standards

Number of stan-dards

The number of titer standards for a Sample (titer) method function in each loop.

1 … 120

pH buffer list The buffer list used for a Sample (calibrate) method function for a pH sensor in each loop. (Info field)

Buffer list

Series

142 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Number of buffers This number will be copied from the method for a Sample (calibrate) method function for a pH sensor in each loop. (Info field)

1 … 9

List of standards The standard list used for a Sample (calibrate) method function for an ISE or conductivity sensor in each loop. (Info field)

List of standards

Number of stan-dards

This number is copied from the method for a Sample (calibrate) method function for an ISE sen-sor in each loop. (Info field)

1 … 9

Standard The standard used for the calibration of a conductivity or temperature sensor. This number is copied from the method for a Sample (calibrate) method function for a corresponding sensor in each loop. (Info field)

List of standards

Start position (name)

Appears per titration stand of the Rondo type in the method assigned within the loop in question. Defines the starting position for the analysis of the series on the rack of the titration stand in question. The positions of the fixed-definition beakers are blocked.

Depends on the rack used

The parameters "Loop", "Number of samples", "Number of buffers", "Number of standards" and "Start position (name)" will repeat in accordance with the number of loops in the assigned method (max. 6 times for the T90)

During the creation of a sample series, you can use the "Samples" softkey to go to the loop list (if the assigned method includes more than one loop) or go directly to the sample list (if the assigned method only contains one loop). From the loop list, you can select a loop to go to the sample list for that loop.For the parameters of the individual samples, see "6.4 Sample parameters".

6.2 Series sequence [T90]

"Series sequence" must be selected for the "Type" parameter.

Parameters Explanation Range of options

Series sequence ID

Here you can assign any ID to the series sequence. Arbitrary

Comments Any comments. Arbitrary

Number of sample series

The quantity of sample series in the series se-quence.

2 … 20

1. Sample series The name of the 1st sample series. Sample series list

Series

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 143

Workspace The workspace where the first sample series is to be run. (In Workspaces A and B, tasks can be performed in parallel if they do not use the same resources. Tasks in each workspace will be per-formed one after the other.)The workspace must be defined for each sample series in the series sequence.

A | B

The parameter "Xth sample series" and "Workspace" repeat according to the number of sample series defined under "Number of sample series".

• A series sequence cannot be saved until at least two sample series have been assigned to it.

6.3 Free sample series

For the "Type" parameter, "Free sample series" must be selected.

Parameters Explanation Range of options

Sample series ID Here you can assign any ID to the free sample series.

Arbitrary

Comments Any comments. Arbitrary

Number of samples

The number of samples the free sample series is to contain.

1 … 120

Entry type The entry type for the samples. Weight | Volume | Number of pieces | Fixed weight | Fixed volume | Fixed num-ber of pieces

At the start of a free sample series, you will only be able to select from among methods that are suitable for the series template. (For example, a method that uses a Rondolino sample changer as the titration stand can only be selected if the free sample series contains a maximum of nine samples.)The system will also only suggest methods whose entry type in the "Sample" method function matches the entry type of the free sample series.

While creating a free sample series, you can press the softkey "Samples" at any time to go directly to the sample list, because free sample series can only be created for methods with only one loop.For the parameters of the individual samples, see "6.4 Sample parameters".

Series

144 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

6.4 Sample parameters

The sample list (which you can get to by pressing the softkey "Samples") lists all of a loop's samples with a number, the first ID (ID 1) and the sample size (which depends on the entry type). They can also be edited there.

For titer loops, they list the standard name and the sample size, and for calibration loops the name of the standard list and the individual standards.

If you select an entry from the list, the following parameters will be available for each sample, depending on the type of the loop in question and on whether it is a template for a sample series or free sample series:

Series template: Sample seriesType of loop: Sample loop

Parameters Explanation Range of options

Number The number of the sample. 1 … number of samples

ID 1 The first ID of the sample as suggested in the "Sample" method function.

Arbitrary

Sample size The size of the sample. The unit will depend on the entry type selected [g | mL | pcs]. (For fixed entry types, only an info field in the method.)

0 … 1000

Weight per piece The weight per item for the "Number of pieces" or "Fixed number of pieces" entry type in the method.

0 … 1000

Density [g/mL] The density of the sample for the entry types "Weight", "Fixed weight", "Volume" and "Fixed volume".

0.0001 … 100

ID2 The second ID of the sample as defined in the method function.

Arbitrary

ID3 The third ID of the sample as defined in the method function.

Arbitrary

Comments Any comments. Arbitrary

Correction factor Any correction factor that can be used in calcula-tions.

0.0001 … 1000000

Temperature The temperature in [°C] during the analysis. This is overwritten in red if the temperature is recorded with a temperature sensor in the method.

-20 … 200

• For entering the sample parameters, particularly for numerous samples, the titrator provides you with assistance in the entry windows of the "ID 1" and "Sample size" parameters:

These extra icons are a quick, direct way to jump to the entry window of the previous sample or next sample.

You can also use the softkeys "Sample ID 1" and "Sample size" to jump back and forth between the entry windows for the sample parameters "ID 1" and "Sample size".

Series

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 145

Series template: Sample seriesType of loop: Titer loop

Parameters Explanation Range of options

Number The number of the sample. 1 … number of samples

Standard The name of the standard used. (Info field) Arbitrary

Type of standard The type (solid or liquid) of the standard used. (Info field)

Solid | Liquid

Comments Any comments. Arbitrary

Sample size The size of the sample. The unit will depend on the entry type selected [g | mL] (For fixed entry types, only an info field in the method.)

Arbitrary

Correction factor Any correction factor that can be used in calcula-tions.

0.0001 … 1000000

Temperature The temperature in [°C] during the analysis. -20 … 200

Series template: Sample seriesType of loop: Calibration loop

Parameters Explanation Range of options

Number The number of the sample. 1 … number of samples

Type The type of the sensor to be calibrated. (Info field) pH | ISE | Conductivity | Temperature

List of standards The name of the standard list used for ISE and conductivity sensors. (Info field)

List of standards

Standard The name of the standard for ISE, conductivity and temperature sensors. (Info field)

List of standards

pH buffer list The name of the pH buffer list used. (Info field) Buffer list

Buffer The name of the buffer. (Info field) Buffer list

Comments Any comments. Arbitrary

Temperature The temperature in [°C] during the analysis. -20 … 200

Series

146 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Series template: Free sample series (only for single-sample loop methods)Type of loop: Sample loop

Parameters Explanation Range of options

Number The number of the sample. 1 … number of samples

ID 1 The fist ID of the sample as defined in the method function.

Arbitrary

Sample size The size of the sample. The unit will depend on the entry type selected [g | mL |pcs]. (For fixed entry types, only an info field in the method.)

0 … 1000

Weight per piece The weight per item for the "Number of pieces" or "Fixed number of pieces" entry type in the method.

0 … 1000

Density [g/mL] The density of the sample for the entry types "Weight", "Fixed weight", "Volume" and "Fixed volume".

0.0001 … 100

Comments Any comments. Arbitrary

Correction factor Any correction factor that can be used in calcula-tions.

0.0001 … 1000000

Temperature [°C] The temperature during the analysis. -20 … 200

• When assigning a method at the start of the series template of a free sample series, the system will ignore the following parameters, which are also defined in the "Sample" method function of the as-signed method, and use the ones defined here. If no values are entered here for these parameters, the values saved in the "Sample" method function will be used.• ID 1• Sample size• Weight per item• Density [g/mL]• Correction factor• Temperature [°C]

Analysis start

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 147

7. Processing sequence of an analysis

7.1 Start of an analysis

An analysis, whether it is a single or multiple determination, can be started in different ways on the titra-tor:

Via a softkey:• Via the "Start" softkey from the method editor• By using the "Start" softkey on the Home screen• Via the "Start" softkey from the "Series" menu• Via the "Calibrate" or "Titer" softkeys from the "Setup" menu (to run a calibration or a titer determi-

nation)

or via a user-specific shortcut or direct shortcut on the home screen.

When you use the "AddToHome" button to create a shortcut, the following parameters will be available:

Parameters Explanation Value range

Type The shortcut's type, which will depend on whether it is to be created for a method, a series, or a manual operation. (Info field)

Manual operation | Method | Series

Description Any name for the shortcut. Arbitrary

Method ID The ID of the method for which you want to create the shortcut. (Info field) (Only appears for "Type" = "Method")

Method list

Series ID The ID of the series for which you want to create the shortcut. (Info field) (Only appears for "Type" = "Series")

Series list

Immediate start Here you can define whether the shortcut should start the analysis directly, without the analysis start screen and without the "Add sample" window. (Direct shortcut)

Yes | No

Homepage posi-tion

Here you can select a free position on the homepage for the shortcut.

1 … 12

Created by The name of the user who created the shortcut. (Info field)

Logged-in user | Admin-istrator

After it is created, the shortcut will appear on the selected position on the home screen and can be se-lected there by clicking on it.

The start of an analysis, no matter whether it is triggered by a softkey or a shortcut, will always take you first to the analysis start screen. (See "2.3.6 Analysis start screen".) The only exceptions are direct shortcuts ("Immediate start" = "Yes"), whose selected settings permit a direct start.

Analysis start

148 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

At the start of an analysis, you can still make changes to various settings in the analysis start screen. For example, immediately before the start of an analysis you can still adjust the sample sizes and define the number of samples to be determined.You can, for example, start a method for multiple samples (or standards) or override the number of samples (or standards) specified in a sample series.If the analysis you want to start is a single determination, you can enter the sample size or sample ID directly as a parameter on the analysis start screen. But you can also always use the "Samples" softkey to enter the sample data for each individual sample. The sample data screen this takes you to displays a list of the individual samples (separated by loop and loop type, if applicable) containing:

• The sample number, ID 1 and sample size (for sample loops)• The sample number, name of the standard and sample size (for titer loop)• The sample number, the name of the standard list and the name of the individual calibration stan-

dard (for calibration loop)

displayed. It also lists the status for each sample (no matter which loop type it has). The follow status levels can be assigned to a sample:

• Ready – the sample is not yet running and thus the sample data can still be edited• Running – the sample is running but the sample data can still be edited• Active – the sample is running and the sample data can no longer be edited• Done – the sample has been run and concluded and the sample data can no longer be editedIf you select a sample, you will be able to define the following sample data (depending on the meth-od):

Parameters Explanation Value range

Number The number of the sample. 1 … 120

ID 1 The first (or only) ID of the sample. (Does not ap-pear for samples of a calibration or titer loop.)

Arbitrary

Sample size You can enter the sample size here. For fixed entry types, this field only appears as an info field.

0 … 1000 [g] | [mL] 0 … 1000000 [pcs.]

Weight per piece For the "Number of pieces" entry type, you can enter the weight per item, in [g].

0 … 1000

Standard The name of the standard for the titer determination. (Only for samples of a titer loop.) (Info field)

Select from the standards defined in the setup.

Type of standard The type of the standard selected. (Only for samples of a titer loop.) (Info field)

Solid | Liquid

Type The type of the sensor to be calibrated. (Only for samples of a calibration loop.) (Info field)

pH | ISE | Conductivity | Temperature

pH buffer list Defines the pH buffer list to be used for the calibra-tion of a pH sensor. (Info field)

Select from the pH buffer lists defined in the setup (auto pH buffer lists)

Buffer The name of the buffer to be used for the calibration of a pH sensor. (Info field)

Select from the buffer list.

List of standards Defines the standard list to be used for the calibra-tion of an ISE or conductivity sensor. (Info field)

Select from the standard lists defined in the setup.

Standard Defines the standard to be used for the calibration of a temperature, ISE or conductivity sensor. (Info field)

Select from the standard list.

Density You can enter the sample's density, in [g/mL], here. (Does not appear for the entry types "Number of pieces" and "Fixed number of pieces".)

0 … 100

Analysis start

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 149

ID 2 The sample's second ID. (Only if "2" or "3" were se-lected in the "Sample" method function for "Number of IDs".) (Does not appear for samples of a calibra-tion or titer loop.)

Arbitrary

ID 3 The sample's third ID. (Only if "3" was selected in the "Sample" method function for "Number of IDs".) (Does not appear for samples of a calibration or titer loop.)

Arbitrary

Comments Here you can enter any comments that you want to be output in the record.

Arbitrary

Correction factor Here you can define a correction factor that can be used in calculations. (Does not appear for samples from a calibration loop.)

0.0001 … 1000000

Temperature The temperature for the determination of the sample, in [°C].

-20 … 200

You can enter the following parameters in the analysis start screen, depending on the type of analysis to be started and the resources used:

Parameters Explanation Value range

Type The type of analysis to be started. Either Method or Series.

Method | Series

Series ID The ID of the series to be started. Arbitrary

Method ID The ID of the method to be started. Arbitrary

Workspace The workspace where the analysis is to be run. (In Workspaces A and B tasks on the T90 can be performed in parallel if they do not use the same resources. Tasks in the same workspace will be performed one after the other in sequential order.)(For T90 only)

A | B

loop The loop in question. (Only appears for the start of methods with multiple loops on the T70 and T90.) (Info field)

1 … 6 (T90)1 … 3 (T70)

Standard The name of the standard for a titer determination. (Info field)

Number of stan-dards

The number of standards to be analyzed with a method or series.

1 … 120

Number of samples

The number of samples to be analyzed with a method or series.

1 … 120

ID 1 Here you can enter an ID for an individual sample. (Appears only if a single sample is to be analyzed.)

Arbitrary

Sample size If only one sample is to be analyzed, you can enter the sample size here. (Info field, if the sample size "Fixed" was defined in the "Sample" method func-tion.)

0 … 1000 [g] | [mL] 0 … 1000000 [pcs.]

pH buffer list The pH buffer list to be used for a calibration loop. (Info field)

Select from the pH buffer lists defined in the setup (auto pH buffer lists).

Number of buffers The number of buffers to be used for a calibration loop. (Info field)

1 … 9

Startp. (Rondo60) When a Rondo is used as the titration stand, you can enter the start position here.

1 … 60

Analysis start

150 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

• All the parameters that can be edited in the analysis start screen or in the sample data screen will overwrite the settings defined in the method for the same parameters.

All non-editable parameters that are displayed as an info field are only shown for orientation pur-poses and list the settings from the method.

If the sample size must be entered before the analysis but the user does not do so, the user will be required to enter it immediately before the start of the analysis.

7.2 Processing sequence of an analysis

During the processing of an analysis, from the start and sample addition to the display of the results, the titrator will display certain screens, some of which the user will have to confirm for the analysis to continue. These screens help ensure that the sequence runs without any problems and also provide information to the user.Depending on the degree to which an analysis is automated, it may make sense to switch off some safety queries or info screens to ensure interruption-free processing. The following two graphics show sample analysis process sequences.The first graphic shows a sequence using a manual or external titration stand, and the second stand shows a sequence using an automatic titration stand. Each one shows where the individual screens can be switched off in the user interface.

Analysis start

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 151

Sample analysis sequence for an analysis with a titration stand of the "Manual stand" or "External stand" type:

<Start>

Analysis start screen

↓<Start>

Can be switched off for the start via shortcut with the "Immediate start" parameter during the creation or management of a shortcut.

Resource check

↓<OK>

Can be switched off with the "Display re-quired resources at start" parameter in the analysis sequence settings. (An error mes-sage will still appear if the resources have already been allocated or are missing.)

This area is run through for each

sample

Query sample size

↓<OK>

Appears when "Entry" = "Before" was se-lected in the "Sample" method function and the sample size = 0. Can be avoided by selected a "fixed" entry type.

Add sample

↓<OK>

Can be switched off for the start via shortcut with the "Immediate start" parameter during the creation or management of a shortcut for the first sample.

↓Online screen

Query sample size

↓<OK>

Appears at the latest before the calculation of the results when "Entry type" = "Arbi-trary" was selected in the "Sample" method function and the sample size = 0. Can be avoided by selected a "fixed" entry type.

↓Results

↓<OK>

Can be switched off with the "Display re-sults after analysis" parameter in the analy-sis sequence settings.

↓Homepage/Analysis start screen

Analysis start

152 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Sample analysis sequence for an analysis with a titration stand of the type "Auto stand", "Rondo60" or "Rondolino TTL":

<Start>

Analysis start screen

↓<Start>

Can be switched off for the start via shortcut with the "Immediate start" parameter during the creation or management of a shortcut.

↓Resource check

↓<OK>

Can be switched off with the "Display re-quired resources at start" parameter in the analysis sequence settings.

This area is run through for each

sample

Online screen

Results

The system ignores the setting of the "Dis-play results after analysis" parameter in the analysis sequence settings and briefly dis-plays the results for each sample without compelling the user to confirm them.

↓Homepage/Analysis start screen

Results

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 153

8. Results

The "Results" menu can be called up directly from the home screen via the corresponding button.

• In the T50 and T70, the system only saves the results from the last analysis (series or individual sample). In the T90 you can use the "Select series" softkey to select the results from the last two analyses.

• When you start a new analysis, you will lose the results from the previous analysis.• You can see the results immediately after they are generated.

You can use the various buttons in the "Results" menu to call up different functions. You can, for ex-ample,

• View all the results from the last analysis (no matter whether of one or of multiple samples).• to add a supplementary result calculation both within (for all samples in the analysis), and outside

a loop (once for the entire analysis).• to view statistics, to perform an outlier test and possibly to exclude samples from the statistics.• to perform recalculations for results in which certain raw data (e.g. sample sizes) have to be

adapted retrospectively for a single sample or for all samples in a series.• to perform an evaluation for the method functions Titration (EQP) and Titration (2 phases) in which

the criteria for identification and evaluation of the equivalence point are retrospectively adapted.

All the changes performed in this menu on the saved results can be reversed with the "Undo changes" button.

• Changes to the results are marked by an asterisk in the record, e.g., VEQ*.

8.1 All results

You can use the "All results" button to view the results of the previous analysis and also to print them out, if a printer is connected to the titrator.In addition, from the Results screen you can also

• Use the "New" softkey to add an extra result (see "8.2 Add result")• Use the "Samples" softkey to view or print out the results of a single sample or exclude the entire

sample (see "8.5 Samples")• Use the "Statistics" softkey to switch to the Statistics screen (see "8.3 Statistics")

8.2 Add result

With the "Add result" button, you can add a subsequent result calculation to your analysis results. To do that, you will first have to specify whether the calculation should be run inside or outside a loop. For calculations within a loop, the result will be added for all the samples (of the same loop) of a series. Since the T70 and T90 can have multiple loops in one method, for these instruments you may have to select the loop for calculations inside a loop. The other parameters must be entered in accordance with the "Calculate" method function. (See "4.7 Method Function Settings".)

Results

154 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

You can use the "Calculate" softkey to calculate the extra result and add it to your analysis results. If you are missing raw data or raw results for the calculation and cannot calculate the result for that reason, the result "NaN" (Not a number) will be added.

8.3 Statistics

You can display and print out a statistic for results inside a sample loop.

• A statistic will only be created if more than one sample was analyzed in the corresponding loop.• If you selected "Statistics functionalities" = "Yes" and "Multiple determination" = "Yes" in the associ-

ated "Calculate" method function, the system will create the statistics for the entire series and also individually for multiple samples within the series.

The following calculated values will be displayed as statistical components:

• Mean value x of a result Rx (Mean [Rx])• Standard deviation s• Relative standard deviation srel

• The number of samples per loop nTOT

If a result was excluded from the statistics, all the results from that sample will always be excluded as well. The system will then recalculate the statistics without the excluded sample and label them accord-ingly. If the sample's results are then put back into the statistical evaluation, the label will be removed from the statistics.

From the Statistics screen, you can also

• Use the "Samples" softkey to view, print or exclude the results of an individual sample (see "8.5 Samples")

• Use the "Results" softkey to view or print all the results (see "8.1 All results")• Use the "Outlier test" to run a test for outliers in the statistical evaluation.

8.3.1 Outlier test

If the results of individual samples in a measurement series deviate greatly from the calculated mean value, it may make sense to question the significance of these (few) results and treat them as "outliers". Outliers will have the following effects on the overall result of an analysis:

- The mean value will be significantly shifted higher or lower.- The standard deviation will increase.- The distribution of the individual values around the mean value will be distorted and no longer fol-

low a normal distribution.The titrator has an automatic function for identifying and labeling outliers. You can call up this function with the "Outlier test" softkey from the Statistics screen.

• You can run an outlier test if you have the results from more than three samples.

Results

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 155

The procedure the titrator uses is the Grubbs outlier test.For this procedure, the system tests the measured value x* that has the greatest deviation from the cal-culated mean value. This number is used in the following equation, together with the mean value x and the standard deviation s:

PG = x* - x

sPG stands for the test size, s for the standard deviation, x the mean value and x* the measured value with the greatest deviation from the mean value.

The test size PG is then compared with the corresponding value in the Grubbs table G (N, 90%), which in turn depends on the number of measured values N:

N (num. of samp.) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

90% - - 1.15 1.46 1.67 1.82 1.94 2.03 2.11 2.18

N (num. of samp.) 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

90% 2.23 2.29 2.33 2.37 2.41 2.44 2.48 2.5 2.53 2.56

N (num. of samp.) 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

90% 2.58 2.6 2.61 2.63 2.65 2.67 2.69 2.7 2.72 2.74

N (num. of samp.) 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

90% 2.75 2.77 2.78 2.79 2.81 2.82 2.83 2.84 2.86 2.87

N (num. of samp.) 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

90% 2.88 2.89 2.9 2.91 2.92 2.92 2.93 2.94 2.95 2.96

N (num. of samp.) 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

90% 2.97 2.97 2.98 2.99 3 3 3.01 3.02 3.02 3.03

N (num. of samp.) 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

90% 3.03 3.04 3.04 3.05 3.05 3.06 3.06 3.07 3.07 3.08

N (num. of samp.) 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

90% 3.08 3.08 3.09 3.09 3.1 3.1 3.11 3.11 3.12 3.12

N (num. of samp.) 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

90% 3.12 3.13 3.13 3.14 3.14 3.15 3.15 3.16 3.16 3.17

N (num. of samp.) 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

90% 3.17 3.17 3.18 3.18 3.19 3.19 3.2 3.2 3.21 3.21

N (num. of samp.) 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110

90% 3.21 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.23 3.23 3.23 3.23 3.24 3.24

N (num. of samp.) 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120

90% 3.24 3.22 3.25 3.25 3.26 3.26 3.26 3.26 3.27 3.27

If the calculated test size PG is greater than the corresponding value taken from the table, the measured value x* is identified as an outlier and labeled accordingly.After the detection of an outlier, the test is repeated with the remaining measured values (minus the outlier already identified) with a newly calculated mean value and standard deviation each time until no more outliers can be identified.The user must now exclude the identified outliers from the statistics. After confirmation, the entire sample will be excluded and the statistics recalculated without the identified and excluded outliers.

Results

156 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

8.4 Recalculate

The "Recalculate" function lets you subsequently recalculate existing results from one sample or from an entire series. As a basis for this recalculation, you can make subsequent changes to certain sample data or enter a new formula.For example, you can adjust the sample size or the correction factor if these values were accidentally incorrectly entered into the method or method start.

• You can only make changes to data that already exist!• If you change data in the "Recalculate" function, all the calculations depending on that data (both

directly and indirectly), inside and outside loops, will be rerun and labeled accordingly.

The following sample data can be subsequently changed:

Changeable parameter Can be changed in recalculations for:

Individual sample All the samples of a loop

Sample type Loop type

Sample Titer Sample Titer

Sample size Yes** -- Yes* --

Standard size -- Yes** -- Yes*

Density Yes -- Yes --

Weight per piece -- -- Yes --

Correction factor Yes Yes Yes Yes

Purity -- -- -- Yes

Standard concentration -- -- -- Yes

Standard density -- Yes -- Yes

* Only for fixed entry type** Only for variable entry type

• The maximum number of results that can be recalculated within a method depends on the maxi-mum number of results that can be generated within a method using the "Calculate" method func-tions. In the T50 you can generate six results per method, and in the T70/T90 you can generate 40 results. The total of the generated results and recalculated results may not exceed this maxi-mum number.

8.5 Samples

You can use the "Samples" button to display and print the status and calculated results of each individual sample. The same applies for a series of additional data sets that can be accessed via the "Data" softkey. This will let you view and print the sample, method and resource data for each sample and view and print the raw results and the measured values.

Results

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 157

You can use the "Exclude" soft key to exclude individual samples from the statistical evaluation. The system will not delete the results of the samples excluded in this way but merely label them as excluded. They will no longer be included in the statistics. Samples that have been excluded can be returned to the statistics at any time using the "Include" softkey.

• If you exclude a sample from a sample group in a multiple determination, no more statistics will be generated for that group. The system will continue to create individual statistics for the remaining sample groups and for all the remaining samples overall.

8.6 Reevaluate

The "Reevaluate" function is only available if the method contains a "Titration (EQP)" or "Titration (two-phase)" method function. This function lets you make subsequent adjustments to the Recognition and evaluation criteria for an equivalence point and thus run a new evaluation of the mea-surement data.

If the method contains multiple titration functions, you will have to select the ones whose recognition criteria you want to adjust.

You can run a reevaluation

• For all the samples of a loop• For one specific sample in a loop

You can adjust the following parameters in the "Evaluation and recognition" subfunction:

• Evaluation procedure• Threshold• Extra EQP criteria• Tendency• Recognition ranges

• Lower limit• Upper limit

• The reevaluation is exclusively run for the selected sample (or samples) and the selected method function. All calculations affected directly or indirectly, inside or outside loops, will be rerun and the results obtained will be labeled.

Results

158 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

8.7 Undo changes

If you make changes to the results saved by the titrator after the analysis, you can use the "Undo changes" softkey to discard them. Afterward, the system will reinstate the initial status directly after the conclusion of the analysis, in its original and unchanged state.

8.8 Delete all results

You can use this softkey to delete all the data (raw data, raw results and results) saved by the titrator in the results range.

Evaluate and calculate

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 159

9. Evaluate and calculate

9.1 Analysis data

The "Analysis data" include different types of data that can be used at various times during the planning and execution of an analysis.

The system differentiates between the following types of analysis data:

Raw data Raw data are created when a method or series is created and automatically generated and stored in the memory during analy-ses. They will always be created for each analysis and cannot be influenced by the user.

Method data All data for the method run.

Series data All data from the series run, such as e.g. the series ID and the num-ber of samples.

Sample data All data from the analyzed samples, such as e.g. the sample size, sample density and sample ID.

Resource data The data of all the resources used during the execution of an analysis, such as e.g. the titer of the titrant used and the calibration data of the sensor used. The data for a resource are copied from the setup at the time when it is used in an analysis.

Table of measured values

Tables of measured values are created by some method functions during an analysis and can be output in the record.

Raw results The raw results are data determined by the titrator during an analysis, such as e.g. detected end points and equivalence point, volumes of titrant used and measured values determined.The raw results can be converted into the actual analysis results in the "Calculate" method function using the appropriate symbols and formulas.Some of the raw results are always produced automatically and oth-ers are only generated when used within a calculation.

Results Results are the results of the conversions of raw results run within the "Calculate" method function. The results of an analysis can be influenced by the user.

Of these, the following can be used in calculations:

• Sample data (such as the sample size or the sample density)• Resource data (such as the titer of a titrant or the calibration data of a sensor)• Raw results (such as the volume of titrant used at the equivalence point)• Results (The results of a calculation can then be used in a subsequent calculation.)

Evaluate and calculate

160 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

9.2 Indexing of method functions

The method functions Titration (EP, EQP, two-phase, Learn EQP), Stating, Measure (normal), Measure (MVT), Dispense and Dispense (controlled) produce their own raw results in a method.The titrator saves these raw results in the order in which the method functions that created them were worked through within the method. To ensure that any time these method functions are used more than once the raw results can still be given a unique assignment to their individual method functions, they are divided into four groups:

Group 1 (all titrations): Method function Titration (EP, EQP, two-phase, Learn EQP)Group 2 (Stating): Method function Stating (normal)Group 3 (all measurements): Method functions Measure (normal) and Measure (MVT)Group 4 (all dispenses): Method function Dispense (normal) and Dispense (controlled)

If method functions from a group are used multiple times within a method, they are given indexes (beyond the loop limits). This group index allows unique referencing of the raw results during calculations.If the structure of a method is changed, the group indices are automatically updated, guaranteeing the serial numbering at all times.

• Make sure your calculations take this condition into consideration!

Calculations can be used independently of the method functions that generated the results. For the results, we suggest the IDs R1-RX, following the sequence of the calculations in the method.

Example: Method function Group index Result

Title

Sample

Titration stand

Stir

Titration (EQP) 1

Titration (EP) 2

Dispense 1

Titration (EQP) 3

Calculation R1

Calculation R2

Calculation R3

End of sample

Sample

Titration stand

Dispense 2

Titration (EP) 4

Titration (EQP) 5

Calculation R4

End of sample

Calculation R5

• The group index "1" can be omitted because when a group index is missing the system automati-cally assigns the group index "1".

Evaluate and calculate

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 161

9.3 Naming conventions for using analysis data in calculations

In calculations (Calculate method function) you can access, with the aid of symbols, or generate certain analysis data (raw results, results, resources and sample data). These symbols consist of basic symbols and various types of symbol extensions. The basic symbols define the data's type (volume, substance quantity, etc.) and the unit. The symbol extensions can specify the data more precisely and include an abbreviation for the group of method functions which the data is to reference. The following applies:

Ti is the group ID of the method functions Titration (EP, EQP, two-phase, LearnEQP) St is the group ID of the method function Stating (normal)Me is the group ID of the method functions Measure (normal) and Measure (MWT)Di is the group ID of the method functions Dispense (normal) and Dispense (controlled)

• Capitalization counts when you are entering the symbols into formulas!• The group ID is only used to differentiate the symbols when it becomes necessary. The group ID

"Ti" for titrations is always omitted.

Basic symbol

UnitSymbol extension

Group ID

Unit (x) Symbol Meaning

V [mL]

EQ--

--

VEQ (=V)

Titrant consumption up to the end point or equiva-lence point of a titration method function. (For multiple equivalence points, the consumption is calculated from the previous equivalence point.)

EX VEX The excess of titrant added after reaching the end point or equivalence point of a titration method function.

END

-- VEND Titrant volume used up to the end of a titration method function.

St VENDSt The total titrant volume used during a stating method function, including the pretitration.

Di VENDDi The total titrant volume used during a dispense method function.

-- -- E(x) VE(x) The titrant volume used until the potential x is reached during a titration method function.

--

--

t(x)

Vt(x) The titrant volume used until the time x is reached dur-ing a titration method function.

St VStt(x) The titrant volume used until the time x is reached dur-ing a stating method function.

Di VDit(x) The titrant volume used until the time x is reached dur-ing a dispense method function.

Evaluate and calculate

162 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Basic symbol

UnitSymbol extension

Group ID

Unit (x) Symbol Meaning

Q [mmol]

EQ

--

--

QEQ (=Q) Substance quantity used up to the end point or equiva-lence point of a titration method function.

EX QEXExcess substance quantity titrated in after reaching the end point or equivalence point of a titration method function.

END

-- QEND The total substance quantity used up to the end of a titration method function.

St QENDSt The total substance quantity used during a stating method function.

Di QENDDi The total substance quantity used during a dispense method function.

-- -- E(x) QE(x) The substance quantity used until the potential x is reached during a titration method function.

--

--

t(x)

Qt(x) The substance quantity used until the time x is reached during a titration method function.

St QStt(x) The substance quantity used until the time x is reached during a stating method function.

Di QDit(x) The substance quantity used until the time x is reached during a dispense method function.

t [min]

--

--

--

t The time of a titration method function.St tSt The time of a stating method function.Di tDi The time of a dispense method function.Me tMe The time of a measurement method function.

USE -- tUseThe time of an analysis of a sample from the start of the loop to the usage of the symbol in the method function "Calculate" (cannot be used for conditions.)

-- CON(x) tCON(x)

Specifies the time for a stating method function until the conversion of x% of the titrant used for stating. (Rela-tive to 100% reaction conversion at the end of a stating method function.)

E

Depends on the sensor(No tem-perature sensor)

EQ

-- --

EEQ The potential at the end point or equivalence point of a titration method function.

HNV EHNV The potential at VEQ/2 of a titration method function. (Not possible for titration (EP)!)

-- E The measured potential of a method function "Measure (normal)".

EST

Depends on the sensor (No tem-perature sensor)

--

--

--

EST The measured potential at the start of a titration method function.

St ESTSt The measured potential at the start of a stating method function.

Di ESTDi The measured potential at the start of a "Dispense (controlled)" method function.

Me ESTMe The measured potential at the start of a "Measure (nor-mal)" or "Measure (MWT)" method function.

EPD

Depends on the sensor (No tem-perature sensor)

--

--

--

EPD The measured potential after the waiting period for predispensing during a titration method function.

St EPDSt The measured potential after the waiting period for predispensing during a stating method function.

EPTDepends on the sensor

-- St -- EPTSt The measured potential after pretitration (before the waiting period) during a stating method function.

Evaluate and calculate

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 163

Basic symbol

UnitSymbol extension

Group ID

Unit (x) Symbol Meaning

T [°C], [K], [°F]

--

TThe measured temperature in a method function "Mea-sure (normal)" (direct measurement with temperature sensor or concomitant temperature acquisition).

TsThe temperature of the sample, standard or buffer solu-tions as specified in the method functions "Sample", "Sample (titer)", or "Sample (calibrate)".

CV [mL/min] -- -- t(x,y) CVt(x,y)Defines the mean consumption (volume) after pretitra-tion per minute between the time points x and y during a stating method function.

CQ [mmol/min]

-- -- t(x,y) CQt(x,y)Defines the mean consumption (substance quantity) per minute between the time points x and y during a stating method function.

CON [%] -- t(x) CONt(x)Specifies the reaction conversion at the time x in per-cent. (Relative to 100% reaction conversion at the end of a stating method function.)

CORR -- -- -- t(x,y) CORRt(x,y)

CVt(x,y) and CQt(x,y) are determined using the linear re-gression of the measured values between x and y. CORR is the coefficient of correlation of this linear regression (volume versus time) and provides a standard for its quality.

TITER -- --

--

--

TITER The titer value for a titrant used in a titration method function.

St TITERSt The titer value for a titrant used in a stating method function.

Di TITERDi The titer value for a titrant used in a dispense method function.

C [mol/L] --

--

--

C Specifies the nominal concentration of a titrant used for a titration method function.

St cSt Specifies the nominal concentration of a titrant used for a stating method function.

Di cDi Specifies the nominal concentration of a titrant used for a dispense method function.

CELLC [1/cm] ----

--CELLC Specifies the cell constant of a conductivity sensor

used for a titration method function.

Me CELLCMe Specifies the cell constant of a conductivity sensor used for measurement method functions.

SLOPEDepends on the sensor

--

--

--

SLOPE Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a Phototro-de for a titration method function.

St SLOPESt Specifies the slope of a pH sensor for a stating method function.

Di SLOPEDi Specifies the slope of a pH sensor for a "Dispense (controlled)" method function.

Me SLOPEMe Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a Phototro-de for a measurement method function.

--

--

E(x)

SLOPEE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a Phototro-de at a potential of x for a titration method function.

St SLOPEStE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH sensor at a potential of x for a stating method function.

Di SLOPEDiE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH sensor at a potential of x for a "Dispense (controlled)" method function.

Me SLOPEMeE(x)Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a Pho-totrode at a potential of x for a measurement method function.

Mean

-- SLOPEMean Specifies the mean slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a Phototrode for a titration method function.

St SLOPEMeanSt Specifies the mean slope of a pH sensor for a stating method function.

Di SLOPEMeanDi Specifies the mean slope of a pH sensor for a "Dis-pense (controlled)" method function.

Me SLOPEMeanMe Specifies the mean slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a Phototrode for a measurement method function.

Evaluate and calculate

164 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Basic symbol

UnitSymbol extension

Group ID

Unit (x) Symbol Meaning

ZERODepends on the sensor

--

--

--

ZERO Specifies the zero point of a pH, ISE or temperature sen-sor or a Phototrode for a titration method function.

St ZEROSt Specifies the zero point of a pH sensor for a stating method function.

Di ZERODi Specifies the zero point of a pH sensor for a "Dispense (controlled)" method function.

Me ZEROMe Specifies the zero point of a pH, ISE or temperature sensor or a Phototrode for a measurement method function.

--

--

E(x)

ZEROE(x)Specifies the zero point of a pH, ISE or temperature sensor or a Phototrode at a potential of x for a titration method function.

St ZEROStE(x) Specifies the zero point of a pH sensor at a potential of x for a stating method function.

Di ZERODiE(x) Specifies the zero point of a pH sensor at a potential of x for a "Dispense (controlled)" method function.

Me ZEROMeE(x)Specifies the zero point of a pH, ISE or temperature sensor or a Phototrode at a potential of x for a mea-surement method function.

Mean

--

--

ZEROMean Specifies the mean zero point of a pH or ISE sensor for a titration method function.

St ZEROMeanSt Specifies the mean zero point of a pH sensor for a stat-ing method function.

Di ZEROMeanDi Specifies the mean zero point of a pH sensor for a "Dispense (controlled)" method function.

Me ZEROMeanMe Specifies the mean zero point of a pH or ISE sensor for a measurement method function.

M [g/mol] -- -- -- M The molecular weight of a substance. (As defined in the setup.)

z -- -- -- -- z The equivalent number of a substance. (As defined in the setup.)

B [µg][mmol]

-- -- -- B[Name] A blank.

H -- -- -- -- H[Name] An auxiliary value.

m[mL][g][pcs]

-- -- -- m The sample size.

d [g/mL] -- -- -- d The density of a sample or a standard.wp [g/pcs] -- -- -- wp The weight per item (can be changed under "Sample").

f -- -- -- -- f A correction factor (as defined in the "Sample" method function).

p [%] -- -- -- p The purity of a solid titer standard.cst [mol/L] -- -- -- cst The concentration of a liquid titer standard.Rx Arbitrary -- -- -- Rx A result x.

C -- -- -- -- CA constant that uniquely belongs to the result Rx. It cannot be used in this form for the calculations of other results.

Mean Arbitrary Rx -- -- Mean[Rx] The mean value of a result Rx.s Arbitrary Rx -- -- s[Rx] The standard deviation of a result Rxsrel [%] Rx -- -- srel[Rx] The relative standard deviation of the result Rx.

n --

--

-- --

n The sample number.TOT nTOT The number of samples in the last loop analyzed.

EQ nEQ The number of equivalent points for the Titration (EQP, Learn EQP or two-phase) method function.

Evaluate and calculate

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 165

• All the symbols listed in the above table can be used in calculations within a loop, with the excep-tion of the "nTOT" symbol. (The nTOT symbol can only be used outside loops and always refers to the immediately prior loop.)

The following symbols can be used calculations outside loops:

M z B[Name] H[Name]

C TITER SLOPE ZERO

CELLC SLOPEE(x) ZEROE(x) SLOPEMean

ZEROMean Mean[Rx] s[Rx] srel[Rx]

VENDDi, QENDDi and tDi (as part of a "Dispense" method function outside loops)

Results (symbol "R") that are generated outside loops can also be used in calculations outside loops.

9.4 Formulas

Calculation formulas can be used in the "Calculate" method function and in the "Condition" (T90) sec-tion of certain method functions. Some parameters within method functions can also be defined in the form of formulas.

Formulas within the "Calculation" method functionOne typical example for a formula within the "Calculation" method function would be the expression R=VEQ in the "Formula" parameter. In this case, the volume of titrant used until reaching the end point or equivalence point is assigned to R. All the symbols can be used for analysis data in relations like this. The analysis data to be used must be generated by the method before the "Calculate" method function.

Formulas for entering values for parameters Formulas can also be used to specify the values for some parameters. For example, you can enter the stirring time in a "Stir" method function in the form of a formula. The result of the formula will then be copied over as a nondimensional value in the unit of the parameter in question.

ConditionsA condition is a formula whose result comes in the form of "true" or "false". Conditions can be used in the T90 model in a variety of method functions in the "Condition" parameter (or subfunction). Depending on the condition's result, the method function in question will be executed (condition true) or not executed (condition false).

• Auxiliary values and blanks defined in the setup can generally be used in formulas in the same manner as symbols. The general form for an auxiliary value is: H[Name] (as defined in the setup).

• Likewise, results from other "Calculation" method functions can be referenced in the "Calculation" method function. (E.g. R3=R2+R1)

(What is important in this case is to make sure that the results used must already be in existence at the time they are to be used!)

Evaluate and calculate

166 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

• Logical operators are only permissible within the "Condition" formulas of the subfunctions (or pa-rameters) for the T90.

9.4.2 Using analysis data in formulas

All analysis data that can be accessed via a symbol can be used in calculation formulas (See "9.3 Nam-ing conventions for using analysis data in calculations"). All analysis data must be generated in the method before the point at which they will be used in a cal-culation formula. For some analysis data, this could be as checked early as during the validation in the processing of a method. For others, whether or not the data are available at the time in question may not be decided until the execution of the method. If the analysis data are not available at the time of the calculation, the result of the calculation formula will be "NaN" ("Not a number").

Analysis data for which symbols have been defined can be used in the most general cases in the fol-lowing format (the separators ’_’ are only used for clarification purposes here; they are not used in the formulas):

Basic symbol plus symbol extension_group ID_symbol index_unit(x,y)_[group index]

• Within the "Formula" parameter in the "Calculate" method function, the formula must be assigned to a result (R1-RX), such as in the format R1=VEQ.

Functions:

Logarithm to base 10 lg(x)

Logarithm to base e ln(x)

Exponential to base 10 pw(x)

Exponential to base e ex(x)

Square sq(x)

Square root sr(x)

Mathematical operators:

Addition +

Subtraction -

Multiplication *

Division /

Comparison operators:

equal to =

larger than >

larger than or equal to >=

smaller than <

smaller than or equal to <=

x in the range of ... < x < ...

not equal to <>

approximately ~

Logical operators:

and AND

or OR

9.4.1 Mathematical Functions and Operators

The following mathematical functions and operators can be used in formulas:

Evaluate and calculate

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 167

Explanation Examples

Basic symbol and symbol extension

Taken together, they serve as an identifier for the analysis data.

VEQ identifies the equivalence point or end point of a titration.

Group ID Specifies which method function group (Ti, Me, Di or St) the method function used to create the analysis data belongs to.

SLOPESt designates the slope of a sen-sor used by a stating method function.

Symbol index Specifies precisely which analysis data are meant if one method func-tion generates analysis data mul-tiple times using the same symbol.If multiple titrants are used in one method function, so the titer and nominal concentration will be used multiple times per generating method function. In this case, the index will define which titrant data are to be used in a calculation.

VEQ2 designates the consumed volume at the 2nd equivalence point of an EQP titration.

c2 references the nominal concentration of the 2nd titrantTITER2 references the titer of the second titrant used.

Unit(x)/Unit(x,y) Unit(x) specifies which time ("t"), potential ("E") or conversion ("CON") the analysis data should reference.

Unit(x,y) specifies the time interval the analysis data should reference.

VE(7) designates the titrant volume required to reach a pH of 7 (for the pH unit).

CVt(1,5) designates the mean stat-ing use per minute in the time interval between one and five minutes.

Group index Specifies which method function within a method function group generates the analysis data.

ESTSt[3] is the designation of the start potential of the 3rd method function from the method function group "Stating".(See also "9.2 Indexing of method func-tions".)

Shortcuts

• Instead of using VEQ and QEQ, you can also use the corresponding short forms (V and Q) in the formulas.

• If you leave out the symbol index of a symbol, Symbol Index 1 will be used. Example: VEQ stands for VEQ1• If you leave out the group index of a symbol, Group Index 1 will be used. Example: VEQ1 stands for VEQ1[1]

All three rules can also be combined. Example: Q stands for QEQ1[1]

Evaluate and calculate

168 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

General examples for the use of a formula in the "Calculate" method function:

R1=VStt(1.5)[2]

This example provides the volume (basic symbol = V) consumed during stating until the time of 1.5 (1 minute, 30 seconds) (unit(x) = time t(x)) as a result for the second method function (group index = 2) from the Stating group (group ID = St).

R2=SLOPEMeE(7)

This example provides the slope (basic symbol = SLOPE) of the sensor used at pH 7 (unit(x) = potential E(x)) as a result for the first method function (group index = 1, can be omitted) from the Measure group (group ID = Me).

8.4.2.1 Assignments in the form of X (condition)

Using the "Calculate" method function within a loop makes it possible to make assignments containing a condition.Conditional assignments of this type can be made using the symbols QEQ, VEQ and EEQ and indexed using the group index.

For example, to calculate the titrant use in mmol for a certain equivalence point on a titration curve con-taining multiple equivalence points, you can link the Symbol QEQ to a condition:

R1=QEQ(EEQ>-50)

The result will be the titrant consumption in mmol for the equivalence point whose potential is above -50 mV (example for a sensor with the sensor unit mV). If multiple equivalence points fulfill this condition, the system will select the one closest to the defined threshold. Equivalence points that are in the range of -51 to -300 mV, for example, will not be considered in this example.

Other examples:

Example Explanation

R1=QEQ(EEQ>-50)[2] Provides the titrant use in mmol for an EQP or EP of the second titration method function whose potential is above -50 mV.

R1=QEQ(EEQ<H[11]) Provides the titrant use in mmol for an EQP whose potential is below the auxiliary value H[11], in mV.

R1=VEQ(EEQ<120) Provides the titrant volume consumption for an EQP whose potential is below 120 mV.

R1=EEQ(10<VEQ<15) Provides the potential of an EQP whose titrant volume use is between 10 and 15 mL.

• Use of the logical operators AND and OR is not permitted within certain conditional assignments. Likewise, you cannot use the mathematical operators (+, -, * and /) within the parenthetical expres-sion.

Evaluate and calculate

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 169

9.5 Explanatory examples

9.5.1 Titration method function

Fig. 1: Predispensing

The following shows the various type of predispensing that can be used during a titration method:

a: To a defined volume (or to the product of a factor and the sample size)b: To a defined potential

EPD Provides the potential after dispensing and the waiting time.

EST Provides the potential at the start of the titration.

Fig. 2: Sample EQP titration containing three equivalence points

The following shows the three (nEQ = 3) recognized equivalence points (1, 2 and 3).

Evaluate and calculate

170 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

VEQ1, VEQ2 and VEQ3 Provide the calculated volume used until each EQP.

QEQ1, QEQ2 and QEQ3 Provide the calculated substance quantity used until each EQP.

EEQ1, EEQ2 and EEQ3 Provide the potential at each EQP.

EHNV1, EHNV2 and EHNV3 Provide the "half neutralization point" for each EQP.

VEX and QEX Provide the excess volume titrated and the excess substance quantity titrated.

VEND and QEND Provide the volume used by the end of the method and the substance quantity of the titrant.

Fig. 3: Example of an EQP titration with the evaluation of defined potentials (x1 and x2)

The following shows the evaluation of a titration curve with regard to the titrant consumption at certain potentials (x1 and x2).

VE(x1) and VE(x2) Provide the titrant volume consumption at Potentials x1 and x2.

QE(x1) and QE(x2) Provide the substance quantity of the titrant consumed at Potentials x1 and x2.

Evaluate and calculate

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 171

Fig. 4: Theoretical example for the evaluation of a titration curve with five points of inflection

Explanation:

This titration curve shows five points of inflection (1 – 5).The system identifies Inflection Points 1, 2 and 4 as possible EQP candidates because only they fall within the two recognition ranges and also meet the "Tendency" and "Threshold" parameters.The "Additional EQP criteria" defined now decide whether the EQP candidates will also be recognized as EQP. These additional EQP criteria can be defined for every recognition range. In the example shown above, the following were specified as additional EQP criteria:

Recognition Range 1: "Last EQP"Recognition Range 2: "No"

Of the two EQP candidates found in Recognition Range 1, the system only identifies the second one as an EQP due to the "Final jump" criterion. The first one remains merely an EQP candidate.

The termination criterion defined was that the titration should be terminated after the recognition of three EQP candidates ("Termination after EQP" = "3"). In the above example the titration is terminated on identification of the 4th turning point (3rd EQP candidate).

Evaluate and calculate

172 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

9.5.2 Stating method function

Fig. 5: Stating example including evaluation at specified points in time (t1, t2)

VENDSt, QENDSt Provide the entire volume consumed and the entire substance quantity consumed

VStt(t1) and VStt(t2) Provide the titrant volume consumed at Times t1 and t2

QStt(t1) and QStt(t2) Provide the substance quantity consumed at Times t1 and t2

Fig. 6: Stating example including pretitration (gray area) and evaluation at specified points in time (t1, t2)

VENDSt, QENDSt Provide the entire volume used and the entire substance quantity used at the end of stating (including the pretitration)

VStt(t1) and QStt(t1) Provide the titrant volume consumption and the substance quantity con-sumption at Time t1 (not including pretitration)

VStt(t2) and QStt(t2) Provide the titrant volume consumption and the substance quantity con-sumption at Time t2 (not including pretitration)

VStt(tCON(100))/QStt(tCON(100))

Provide the titrant volume consumption and the substance quantity con-sumption at the end of stating (not including pretitration)

Evaluate and calculate

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 173

Fig. 7: Stating example including evaluation of the mean titrant consumption

The following is a stating example including the evaluation of the mean consumption between Times t1 and t2. CVt(t1,t2) and CQt(t1,t2) are determined using linear regression over the measured values between Times t1 and t2. CORRt(t1,t2) specifies the coefficient of correlation of this linear regression.

CVt(t1,t2) Provides the mean titrant consumption between t1 and t2 in the form of volume per time.

CQt(t1,t2) Provides the mean titrant consumption between t1 and t2 in the form of substance quantity per time.

Evaluate and calculate

174 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

9.6 Titrator evaluation procedure

The identification of equivalence point candidates within a defined recognition range can be done using four different methods:

• Standard• Minimum/Maximum• Segmented• Asymmetrical

Which method you use for the evaluation will depend on the type of titration or the form of the resulting titration curve. The procedure to be used is defined in the "Evaluation and recognition" method sub-function of the "Titration (EQP)" and "Titration (two-phase)" method functions.

9.6.1 Standard Evaluation Procedure

The titrator's standard evaluation procedure is based on the chemical model of a classic acid-base titra-tion. In this model, the equivalence point of such a titration will be at the point of inflection of the S-shaped titration curve and the curve will be symmetrical with regard to this inflection point.

E

V

Inflection point

For the recognition of an inflection point using the stan-dard procedure, the titrator will always look at one group of measured values (a "measured value window"). It will examine whether an inflection point is detectable for that group of measured values. This window will then be shifted along the curve by one measured value and reexamined for points of inflection. The system repeats this procedure until it detects no inflection point twice in a row. It then uses the inflection points found to define the most suitable one as the final inflection point of the titration.

The standard evaluation procedure only identifies points of inflection, at first. Criteria defined by the user in the method can influence whether and when an inflection point is to be registered as an EQP candidate. (These criteria can be defined in the "Evaluation and recognition" subfunction of the "Titration EQP" and "Titration (two-phase)" method functions).

If so defined in the method, the following criteria will have to be fulfilled:

• The point of inflection must lie within a recognition range.• It must be above a threshold.• The titration curve must demonstrate a specified tendency in the area of the inflection point.

If these criteria are met, the inflection point will become an EQP candidate.With the aid of the additional EQP criteria, you can now influence which EQP candidates will finally be recognized as equivalence points.For the standard evaluation, the additional criteria "Last EQP" and "Steepest jump" are available in the method. They can be selected individually for each defined recognition range. For an explanatory example, see "9.5.1 Titration method function".

Evaluate and calculate

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 175

9.6.2 Minimum/Maximum

The result of this evaluation is the minimum (maximum) calculated from the titration's measured points. The classic example of a titration curve with a minimum is the photometrically indexed surfactant deter-mination.

E

V

The minimum (maximum) is calculated using a polynomial approximation of the titration curve in the range of the minimum (maximum). The equiva-lence point recognition is done directly from the titration curve data.

9.6.3 Segmented

Various indication methods (including photometry, conductometry and amperometry) generate titration with linear or approximately linear sections (segmented curves). The titrator uses individual procedures to evaluate these curves. For a precise determination of the equivalence point, it is very important that these curves have both linear segments and a clear bend.

V

E/ V

V

V

E

2E/ V2

Titration curveThe titration curve contains two more less linear segments and a bend between these two seg-ments. The evaluation of segmented curves is gen-erally done with the aid of the standard procedure for S-shaped curves, with the system using as its evaluation basis not the titration curve's measured points but the data calculated from them in the first derivative.

1. DerivativeThe first derivative of a segmented curve is the first to demonstrate the typical S shape. Its inflection point is the titration's equivalence point.

2. DerivativeThe threshold references the second derivative of the titration curve. In other words, the equivalence point for a defined threshold must be above this threshold number.

Evaluate and calculate

176 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

9.6.4 Asymmetrical

For markedly asymmetrical curves, the standard procedure can result in a systematic error. The difference between the true equivalence point and the point of inflection can be greater than the normally achievable precision. For these cases, the titrator uses an evaluation that uses the Tubbs method. This empirical approximation method is a procedure for the evaluation of asymmetrical, analog-registered titration curves. It can also be used for digitally recorded titration curves. The Tubbs procedure result will be closer to the true equivalence point for some asymmetrical curves than the inflection point. This evaluation procedure is based on the following considerations:

E

V

M

M

1

2

EQP

Each of the two branches of the titration curve will have a writable osculating circle with a minimal radius. The relationship between the two radii is determined by the curve's asymmetry. The inter-section of the connecting lines between the circle center points M1 and M2 and the titration curve produces the desired equivalence point. Theoreti-cal calculations show that the true equivalence point for asymmetrical titration curves will always lie between the inflection point and the branch of the titration curve with the greater degree of curva-ture (i.e. the smaller osculating circle).

The titrator uses a hyperbola to approximate those parts of the titration curve located in the area of the greatest curvature. For each approximated hyperbola, the system determines the peak (the point with the greatest curvature). The center points of the assigned smallest osculating circles are the focal points of both hyperbolas. The intersection of the connection lines from the two focal points and the titration curve produces the desired equivalence point, as shown above. The evaluation requires at least six measured values in the area of the greatest curvature before and after the titration curve's inflection point. If the course of the titration curve does not permit the inclusion of the osculating circles, the titrator will use the standard procedure to calculate the equivalence point. You will be notified of this in the record of the "raw results".

Evaluate and calculate

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 177

9.7 Sample formulas

R = QEQ*C/m (standard formula)

Content of a sample or sample solution.

R = m/(VEQ*c*C) Titer determined with the standard substance or standard solution.

R = QEQ*C Content per sample.

R = QEQ Result in the form of substance quantity consumption.

R = VEQ Result in the form of volume consumption.

R = VEQ/m Result in the form of volume consumption per weight or per vol-ume.

R = (QENDDi-QEQ)*C/m Back titration QENDDi: Dispensed substance quantity of the "Dispense" method function.QEQ: Substance quantity used until the end point or equivalence point of a "Titration" method function.

R = (QEQ-B[Name])*C/m Solvent blank (B[Name]) referenced in the result calculation.

R = (QEQ/m-B[Name])*C Matrix blank referenced in the calculation [mmol/g].

R = EST[2] Initial potential of the second "Titration" method function.

R = pw(-E)*1000 The ion concentration in [mmol/L], measured as pX or pM with an ion-selective electrode.

Evaluate and calculate

178 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Des

ired

indi

catio

n of

the

resu

lt:

cont

ent p

er g

ram

of t

he s

ampl

e

Inpu

t of t

he s

ampl

e in

[g]

: R

= Q

EQ*C

/mIn

put o

f the

sam

ple

in [

mL]

: R

= Q

EQ*C

/(m

*d)

Inpu

t of t

he s

ampl

e in

[pc

.]:

R =

QEQ

*C/(

m*w

p)

Des

ired

indi

catio

n of

the

resu

lt:

cont

ent p

er m

illili

ter o

f the

sam

ple

Inpu

t of t

he s

ampl

e in

[m

L]:

R =

QEQ

*C/m

Inpu

t of t

he s

ampl

e in

[g]

: R

= Q

EQ*C

/(m

/d)

Des

ired

indi

catio

n of

the

resu

lt:

Con

tent

per

item

of t

he s

ampl

e

Inpu

t of t

he s

ampl

e in

[pc

.]:

R =

QEQ

*C/m

Con

stan

tU

nit

Con

stan

tU

nit

Con

stan

tU

nit

C =

1/z

[mm

ol/g

], [m

ol/k

g]C

= 1

/z[m

mol

/mL]

, [m

ol/L

]C

= 1

/z[m

mol

/pc.]

C =

M/z

[mg/

g], [

g/kg

]C

= M

/z[m

g/m

L], [

g/L]

C =

M/z

[mg/

pc.]

C =

1[m

eq/g

], [

eq/k

g]C

= 1

[meq

/mL]

, [eq

/L]

C =

1[m

eq/p

c.]

C =

100

0/z

[mm

ol/k

g], [

µmol

/g]

C =

100

0/z

[mm

ol/L

], [

µmol

/mL]

C =

100

0/z

[µm

ol/p

c.]

C =

100

0[m

eq/k

g], [

µeq/

g]C

= 1

000

[meq

/L],

[µe

q/m

L]C

= 1

000

[µeq

/pc.]

C =

M*1

000/

z[p

pm],

[mg/

kg],

[µg

/g]

C =

M*1

000/

z[m

g/L]

, [µg

/mL]

C =

M*1

000/

z[µ

g/pc

.]

C =

M--

C =

M--

C =

M--

C =

M*1

000

--C

= M

*100

0--

C =

M*1

000

--

C =

M/(1

0*z)

[%]

(w/w

)C

= M

/(10*

z)[g

/100

mL]

, [%

] (w

/v)

C =

M/(1

0*z)

--

C =

56,

1[m

gKO

H/g

] (T

AN, T

BN)

C =

56,

1--

C =

56,

1--

The

data

sho

wn

abov

e ap

plie

s si

mila

rly fo

r mor

e co

mpl

ex c

onte

nt d

eter

min

atio

ns a

s w

ell:

Back

titra

tion

cont

ent:

R =

(Q

END

Di-Q

)*C/

mCo

nten

t with

bla

nk:

R =

(Q

EQ-B

[Nam

e])*

C/m

Stat

ing

cont

ent:

R

= Q

END

St*C

/mC

alcu

latio

n fo

rmul

as fo

r the

tite

r det

erm

inat

ion

9.8 Constants within a Content Calculation

The tables below provide an overview of how to select the C constant in content determinations depending on the unit for the desired results and the data entered.

Evaluate and calculate

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 179

Standard type: fixed (entry type = weight)

R = m/(VEQ*c*C) C = M/(10*p*z)

Standard type: liquid (entry type = volume)

R = m/(VEQ*c*C) C = 1/(cst*z)

Standard type: liquid (entry type = weight)

R = m/(VEQ*c*C) C = d/(cst*z)

Evaluate and calculate

180 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Appendix

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 181

10. Appendix

10.1 Predefined Calibration Standards

Overview: Pre-defined calibration standards lists for pH sensors

List Name METTLER TOLEDO EU (Ref. 25 °C)

METTLER TOLEDO USA (Ref. 25 °C)

DIN (19266) / NIST (Ref. 25 °C)

MERCK (Ref. 20 °C)

FLUKA (Ref. 20 °C)

Novartis (Fluka) (Ref. 20 °C)

FISHER (Ref. 25 °C)

DIN (19267) (Ref. 25 °C)

JIS Z 8802 (Ref. 25 °C)

JJG119 (Ref. 25 °C)

Calibra-tion Standards Included

2.00 1.68 1.680 1.00 1.00 4.00 1.00 1.09 1.679 1.6804.01 4.01 3.557 2.00 2.00 7.00 2.00 3.06 4.008 3.5594.60 7.00 3.775 3.00 3.00 9.00 3.00 4.65 6.865 4.0037.00 10.01 4.008 4.00 4.00 4.00 6.79 7.413 6.8649.21 6.865 4.66 5.00 5.00 9.23 9.180 7.409

10.00 7.416 5.00 6.00 6.00 12.75 10.01 9.18211.00 9.184 6.00 7.00 7.00 12.460

10.014 6.88 8.00 8.0012.454 7.00 9.00 8.991

8.00 10.00 10.009.00 11.00 11.009.22 12.0010.00 13.0011.0012.0013.00

METTLER TOLEDO EU (Ref. 25 °C)

Temperature°C

2.00 4.01 4.60 7.00 9.21 10.00 11.00

0 2.03 4.01 4.66 7.12 9.52 10.65 11.905 2.02 4.01 4.65 7.09 9.45 10.52 11.7210 2.01 4.00 4.64 7.06 9.38 10.39 11.5415 2.00 4.00 4.63 7.04 9.32 10.26 11.3620 2.00 4.00 4.62 7.02 9.26 10.13 11.1825 2.00 4.01 4.60 7.00 9.21 10.00 11.0030 1.99 4.01 4.61 6.99 9.16 9.87 10.8235 1.99 4.02 4.62 6.98 9.11 9.74 10.6440 1.98 4.03 4.63 6.97 9.06 9.61 10.4645 1.98 4.04 4.64 6.97 9.03 9.48 10.2850 1.98 4.06 4.66 6.97 8.99 9.35 10.1055 1.98 4.08 4.67 6.98 8.96 9.22 9.92 60 1.98 4.10 4.69 6.98 8.93 9.09 9.74 70 1.99 4.16 4.71 7.00 8.88 8.96 9.56 80 2.00 4.22 4.73 7.04 8.83 8.83 9.38 90 2.00 4.30 4.75 7.09 8.79 8.70 9.20 95 2.00 4.35 4.77 7.12 8.77 8.57 9.02

Appendix

182 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

METTLER TOLEDO USA (Ref. 25 °C)

Temperature°C

1.68 4.01 7.00 10.01

5 1.67 4.01 7.09 10.2510 1.67 4.00 7.06 10.1815 1.67 4.00 7.04 10.1220 1.68 4.00 7.02 10.0625 1.68 4.01 7.00 10.0130 1.68 4.01 6.99 9.9735 1.69 4.02 6.98 9.9340 1.69 4.03 6.97 9.8945 1.70 4.04 6.97 9.8650 1.71 4.06 6.97 9.83

DIN (19266)/NIST (Ref. 25 °C)

Temperature °C

1.680 3.557 3.775 4.008 6.865 7.416 9.184 10.014 12.454

0 1.666 3.577 3.863 4.010 6.984 7.534 9.464 10.317 13.4235 1.668 3.573 3.837 4.004 6.950 7.502 9.392 10.248 13.20710 1.670 3.569 3.819 4.001 6.922 7.474 9.331 10.180 13.00315 1.672 3.565 3.801 4.001 6.900 7.451 9.277 10.121 12.81020 1.676 3.561 3.787 4.003 6.880 7.432 9.228 10.066 12.62725 1.680 3.557 3.775 4.008 6.865 7.416 9.184 10.014 12.45430 1.685 3.553 3.766 4.015 6.853 7.405 9.144 9.970 12.28935 1.691 3.549 3.759 4.026 6.845 7.396 9.110 9.928 12.13340 1.697 3.549 3.754 4.036 6.837 7.389 9.076 9.892 11.98445 1.704 3.544 3.751 4.049 6.834 7.386 9.046 9.856 11.84150 1.712 3.548 3.748 4.064 6.833 7.384 9.018 9.830 11.70555 1.715 3.554 3.750 4.075 6.834 7.382 8.985 9.804 11.57460 1.723 3.560 3.753 4.091 6.836 7.380 8.962 9.778 11.44970 1.743 3.580 3.763 4.126 6.845 7.378 8.921 9.752 11.324 80 1.766 3.609 3.780 4.164 6.859 7.376 8.885 9.726 11.199 90 1.792 3.650 3.802 4.205 6.877 7.374 8.850 9.700 11.074 95 1.806 3.674 3.815 4.227 6.886 7.372 8.833 9.674 10.949

MERCK (Ref. 20 °C)

Temperature °C

1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 4.66 5.00 6.00 6.88

0 0.96 2.01 3.05 4.05 4.68 5.06 6.04 6.985 0.99 2.01 3.05 4.04 4.68 5.05 6.02 6.9510 0.99 2.01 3.03 4.02 4.67 5.02 6.01 6.9215 0.99 2.00 3.01 4.01 4.67 5.01 6.00 6.9020 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 4.66 5.00 6.00 6.8825 1.01 2.00 3.00 4.01 4.66 5.00 6.02 6.8630 1.01 2.00 3.00 4.01 4.66 5.00 6.03 6.8635 1.01 2.00 3.00 4.01 4.66 5.00 6.03 6.8540 1.01 2.00 2.98 4.01 4.67 5.00 6.04 6.8445 1.01 2.00 2.98 4.01 4.67 5.01 6.05 6.8450 1.01 2.00 2.97 4.00 4.68 5.01 6.06 6.8460 1.02 2.00 2.97 4.00 4.69 5.04 6.10 6.8470 1.02 2.01 2.97 4.00 4.70 5.05 6.12 6.8480 1.02 2.01 2.97 4.00 4.71 5.10 6.17 6.8690 1.02 2.01 2.96 4.00 4.72 5.14 6.24 6.88

Appendix

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 183

MERCK (Ref. 20 °C) (continued)

Temperature °C

7.00 8.00 9.00 9.22 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.00

0 7.13 8.15 9.24 9.46 10.26 11.45 12.58 13.805 7.07 8.10 9.16 9.40 10.17 11.32 12.41 13.5910 7.05 8.07 9.11 9.33 10.11 11.20 12.26 13.3715 7.02 8.04 9.05 9.28 10.05 11.10 12.10 13.1820 7.00 8.00 9.00 9.22 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.0025 6.98 7.96 8.95 9.18 9.94 10.90 11.88 12.8330 6.98 7.94 8.91 9.14 9.89 10.81 11.72 12.6735 6.96 7.92 8.88 9.10 9.84 10.72 11.67 12.5940 6.95 7.90 8.85 9.07 9.83 10.64 11.54 12.4145 6.95 7.88 8.82 9.04 9.79 10.56 11.44 12.2850 6.95 7.85 8.79 9.01 9.74 10.48 11.33 12.1560 6.96 7.83 8.73 8.96 9.67 10.33 11.04 11.7570 6.96 7.80 8.70 8.93 9.62 10.19 10.90 11.6180 6.97 7.78 8.66 8.89 9.55 10.06 10.70 11.3990 7.00 7.75 8.64 8.85 9.49 9.93 10.48 11.15

FLUKA (Ref. 20 °C)

Temperature °C

1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.00

0 0.94 1.99 3.03 4.03 5.05 6.03 7.13 8.18 9.24 10.24 11.45 12.58 13.7110 0.99 1.99 3.02 4.02 5.02 6.01 7.05 8.09 9.11 10.10 11.20 12.26 13.3520 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.0030 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.02 6.98 7.94 8.93 9.90 10.81 11.75 12.6640 1.01 2.00 2.99 4.00 5.00 6.04 6.97 7.90 8.86 9.82 10.64 11.53 12.3750 1.01 2.00 2.98 4.00 5.02 6.06 6.96 7.86 8.80 9.75 10.48 11.31 12.1060 1.01 2.00 2.98 4.00 5.04 6.09 6.96 7.82 8.75 9.68 10.33 11.09 11.8470 1.01 2.00 2.98 4.00 5.07 6.13 6.97 7.80 8.71 9.62 10.19 10.88 11.6180 1.02 2.00 2.98 4.00 5.10 6.18 6.98 7.77 8.67 9.55 10.06 10.68 11.4090 1.02 2.00 2.97 4.00 5.13 6.24 7.00 7.75 8.64 9.49 9.93 10.48 11.20

Novartis (Fluka) (Ref. 20 °C)

Temperature °C

4.00 7.00 9.00

0 4.01 7.11 9.205 4.00 7.08 9.1510 4.00 7.05 9.1015 4.00 7.02 9.0520 4.00 7.00 9.0025 4.01 6.98 8.9630 4.01 6.97 8.9135 4.02 6.96 8.8840 4.03 6.95 8.8445 4.04 6.94 8.8050 4.06 6.94 8.7755 4.07 6.93 8.7460 4.09 6.93 8.7165 4.11 6.93 8.6970 4.13 6.94 8.6775 4.14 6.94 8.6580 4.16 6.95 8.6385 4.18 6.96 8.6190 4.21 6.97 8.6095 4.23 6.98 8.59

Appendix

184 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

FISHER (Ref. 25 °C)

Temperature °C

1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 8.991 10.00 11.00

0 N/A N/A N/A 4.01 5.05 6.07 7.13 8.15 9.166 10.34 11.805 0.95 1.98 2.98 3.99 5.04 6.05 7.10 8.13 9.126 10.26 11.6910 0.98 1.98 2.97 4.00 5.03 6.06 7.07 8.08 9.089 10.19 11.4615 1.01 2.02 3.00 3.99 4.99 6.05 7.05 8.01 9.055 10.12 11.3120 1.01 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.02 8.00 9.022 10.06 11.1725 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 8.991 10.00 11.0030 1.02 2.00 3.02 4.01 5.01 5.99 6.99 8.00 8.961 9.94 10.8835 1.03 2.02 3.03 4.02 5.01 5.98 6.98 7.95 8.930 9.90 10.7640 1.02 2.01 3.03 4.03 5.04 5.97 6.97 7.94 8.902 9.85 10.6245 1.03 2.01 3.04 4.04 5.06 5.97 6.97 7.94 8.874 9.81 10.52 50 1.03 2.01 3.04 4.06 5.08 5.96 6.97 7.93 8.845 9.78 10.4155 4.07 6.97 8.815 9.7460 4.09 6.98 8.784 9.70 65 4.11 6.99 9.6870 4.13 7.00 9.6575 4.14 7.02 9.6380 4.16 7.03 9.6285 4.18 7.06 9.6190 4.21 7.08 9.6095 4.23 7.11 9.60

DIN (19267) (Ref. 25 °C)

Temperature°C

1.09 3.06 4.65 6.79 9.23 12.75

0 1.08 3.12 4.67 6.89 9.48 13.89 5 1.08 3.11 4.67 6.87 9.43 13.6310 1.09 3.10 4.66 6.84 9.37 13.3715 1.09 3.09 4.66 6.82 9.32 13.1620 1.09 3.07 4.65 6.80 9.27 12.9625 1.09 3.06 4.65 6.79 9.23 12.7530 1.10 3.05 4.65 6.78 9.18 12.6135 1.10 3.05 4.65 6.77 9.13 12.4540 1.10 3.04 4.66 6.76 9.09 12.2945 1.10 3.04 4.67 6.76 9.04 12.0950 1.11 3.04 4.68 6.76 9.00 11.9860 1.11 3.04 4.70 6.76 8.92 11.6970 1.11 3.04 4.72 6.76 8.88 11.4380 1.12 3.05 4.75 6.78 8.85 11.1990 1.13 3.07 4.79 6.80 8.82 10.99

Appendix

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 185

JIS Z 8802 (Ref. 25 °C)

Temperature°C

1.679 4.008 6.865 7.413 9.180 10.01

0 1.666 4.003 6.984 7.534 9.464 10.325 1.668 3.999 6.951 7.500 9.395 10.2410 1.670 3.998 6.923 7.472 9.332 10.1815 1.672 3.999 6.900 7.448 9.276 10.1220 1.675 4.002 6.881 7.429 9.225 10.0625 1.679 4.008 6.865 7.413 9.180 10.0130 1.683 4.015 6.853 7.400 9.139 9.9735 1.688 4.024 6.844 7.389 9.102 9.9240 1.694 4.035 6.838 7.380 9.068 9.8945 1.700 4.047 6.834 7.373 9.038 9.8650 1.707 4.060 6.833 7.367 9.011 9.8355 1.715 4.075 6.834 7.361 8.985 9.80 60 1.723 4.091 6.836 7.355 8.962 9.77 70 1.743 4.126 6.845 7.349 8.921 9.74 80 1.766 4.164 6.859 7.343 8.885 9.71 90 1.792 4.205 6.877 7.337 8.850 9.68 95 1.806 4.227 6.886 7.331 8.833 9.65

JJG119 (Ref. 25 °C)

Temperature°C

1.680 3.559 4.003 6.864 7.409 9.182 12.460

0 1.668 3.599 4.006 6.981 7.515 9.458 13.4165 1.669 3.591 3.999 6.949 7.490 9.391 13.21010 1.671 3.583 3.996 6.921 7.467 9.330 13.01115 1.673 3.575 3.996 6.898 7.445 9.276 12.82020 1.676 3.567 3.998 6.879 7.426 9.226 12.63725 1.680 3.559 4.003 6.864 7.409 9.182 12.46030 1.684 3.551 4.010 6.852 7.395 9.142 12.29235 1.688 3.547 4.019 6.844 7.386 9.105 12.13040 1.694 3.547 4.029 6.838 7.380 9.072 11.97545 1.700 3.550 4.042 6.834 7.379 9.042 11.82850 1.706 3.555 4.055 6.833 7.383 9.015 11.69755 1.713 3.563 4.070 6.834 7.387 8.990 11.55360 1.721 3.573 4.087 6.837 7.391 8.968 11.42670 1.739 3.596 4.122 6.847 7.399 8.926 11.17280 1.759 3.622 4.161 6.862 7.407 8.890 10.91890 1.782 3.648 4.203 6.881 7.415 8.856 10.66495 1.795 3.660 4.224 6.891 7.419 8.839 10.537

Appendix

186 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Overview: Pre-defined calibration standard lists for conductivity sensors

List Name REAGECON (Ref. 25 °C)

Mettler TOLEDO (Ref. 25 °C)

Conductivity StandardsIncluded

1.3 µS/cm5 µS/cm10 µS/cm20 µS/cm50 µS/cm84 µS/cm 84 µS/cm100 µS/cm147 µS/cm200 µS/cm500 µS/cm1000 µS/cm1413 µS/cm 1413 µS/cm

5 mS/cm10 mS/cm

12.88 mS/cm 12.88 mS/cm20 mS/cm50 mS/cm100 mS/cm150 mS/cm200 mS/cm300 mS/cm350 mS/cm450 mS/cm500 mS/cm

REAGECON (Ref. 25 °C)

Temperature °C

1.3 µS/cm 5 µS/cm 10 µS/cm 20 µS/cm 50 µS/cm 84 µS/cm 100 µS/cm 147 µS/cm

5 0.67 3.02 6.13 12.67 31.43 53.02 62.82 92.710 0.82 3.47 7.10 14.36 35.89 60.34 71.64 105.615 0.97 3.97 7.95 16.11 40.23 67.61 80.56 118.516 1.00 4.07 8.15 16.50 41.21 69.25 82.50 121.417 1.03 4.18 8.37 16.89 42.18 70.89 84.45 124.218 1.07 4.28 8.56 17.28 43.16 72.52 86.39 127.119 1.10 4.38 8.78 17.67 44.14 74.16 88.33 129.920 1.13 4.48 8.97 18.06 45.13 75.80 90.28 132.821 1.16 4.59 9.18 18.44 46.10 77.44 92.22 135.622 1.20 4.69 9.38 18.83 47.08 79.08 94.17 138.523 1.23 4.79 9.59 19.22 48.05 80.72 96.11 141.324 1.27 4.90 9.79 19.61 49.03 82.36 98.06 144.225 1.30 5.00 10.00 20.00 50.00 84.00 100.00 147.026 1.33 5.10 10.21 20.39 50.99 85.64 101.95 149.827 1.35 5.21 10.41 20.78 51.95 87.28 103.89 152.728 1.38 5.31 10.62 21.17 52.93 88.91 105.83 155.529 1.40 5.41 10.82 21.56 53.91 90.55 107.78 158.430 1.43 5.52 11.03 21.95 54.88 92.19 109.72 161.235 1.58 6.07 12.14 24.06 60.06 100.92 119.69 177.040 1.74 6.63 13.29 26.16 65.22 109.21 130.17 191.545 1.88 7.15 14.44 28.38 70.57 118.05 140.67 207.450 2.04 7.66 15.55 30.67 76.08 126.80 151.35 222.9

Appendix

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 187

REAGECON (Ref. 25 °C) (continued)

Temperature °C

200 µS/cm 500 µS/cm 1000 µS/cm 1413 µS/cm 5 mS/cm 10 mS/cm 12.88 mS/cm 20 mS/cm

5 127.3 315.3 633 894 3182 6367 8216 1281010 144.8 359.6 718 1007 3616 7234 9326 1451215 161.7 402.9 808 1139 4047 8104 10439 1623916 165.5 412.6 827 1167 4142 8294 10684 1661517 169.3 422.4 846 1194 4237 8484 10929 1699118 173.2 432.1 865 1221 4333 8673 11174 1736719 177.0 441.8 885 1249 4428 8863 11419 1774320 180.8 451.5 904 1276 4523 9052 11664 1811921 184.7 461.2 923 1304 4619 9242 11909 1849622 188.5 470.9 942 1331 4714 9431 12153 1887223 192.3 480.6 962 1358 4809 9621 12398 1924824 196.2 490.3 981 1386 4905 9810 12643 1962425 200.0 500.0 1000 1413 5000 10000 12880 2000026 203.8 509.7 1019 1440 5095 10190 13133 2037627 207.7 519.4 1038 1468 5191 10379 13378 2075228 211.5 529.1 1058 1495 5286 10569 13623 2112829 215.3 538.8 1077 1522 5381 10758 13867 2150530 219.2 548.5 1096 1550 5477 10948 14112 2188135 240.0 602.5 1200 1694 5985 11952 15392 2386940 260.6 655.3 1301 1833 6501 12954 16678 2583245 282.0 710.1 1406 1989 7013 14006 18024 2787650 303.4 764.6 1517 2139 7515 15032 19338 29922

REAGECON (Ref. 25 °C) (continued)

Temperature °C

50 mS/cm 100 mS/cm 150 mS/cm 200 mS/cm 300 mS/cm 350 mS/cm 450 mS/cm 500 mS/cm

5 32431 66141 100922 136689 210384 248247 321335 35680410 36592 74301 112456 152103 232327 272909 353892 39287415 40798 82458 124602 167414 254120 298010 385574 42903316 41719 84212 127142 170673 258708 303209 392017 43613017 42639 85967 129682 173931 263296 308408 398459 44322718 43559 87721 132222 177190 267884 313607 404902 45032319 44479 89475 134761 180448 272472 318806 411344 45742020 45399 91229 137301 183707 277060 324005 417787 46451721 46319 92983 139841 186966 281648 329204 424230 47161322 47240 94737 142381 190224 286236 334403 430672 47871023 48160 96492 144920 193483 290824 339602 437115 48580724 49080 98246 147460 196741 295412 344801 443557 49290325 50000 100000 150000 200000 300000 350000 450000 50000026 50920 101754 152540 203259 304588 355199 456443 50709727 51840 103508 155080 206517 309176 360398 462885 51419328 52761 105263 157619 209776 313764 365597 469328 52129029 53681 107017 160159 213034 318352 370796 475770 52838730 54601 108771 162699 216293 322940 375995 482213 53548335 59334 118005 175829 233217 346228 402200 512500 56846840 64070 127035 188666 249976 369429 428442 543966 60313145 69002 135799 202203 266899 393776 454931 573348 63605450 74014 145808 215472 284025 417233 481705 601515 667245

Appendix

188 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

METTLER TOLEDO (Ref. 25 °C)

Temperature °C

84 µS/cm 1413 µS/cm 12.88 mS/cm

5 53.02 894 821610 60.34 1007 932615 67.61 1139 1043916 69.25 1167 1068417 70.89 1194 1092918 72.52 1221 1117419 74.16 1249 1141920 75.80 1276 1166421 77.44 1304 1190922 79.08 1331 1215323 80.72 1358 1239824 82.36 1386 1264325 84.00 1413 1288026 85.64 1440 1313327 87.28 1468 1337828 88.91 1495 1362329 90.55 1522 1386730 92.19 1550 1411235 100.92 1694 1539240 109.21 1833 1667845 118.05 1989 1802450 126.80 2139 19338

Appendix

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 189

10.2 METTLER MethodsMETTLER methods are preprogrammed methods for executing specific applications (e.g. chloride in ketchup). These methods are stored in the device prior to shipping (Methods List) and can be started immediately by the user. METTLER methods not only provide the sequence of the method functions, but they also define all of the method function settings. A METTLER method can be saved as a user method by saving it under a different method ID.

ID Title Description Titrants Sensor

M400 Acetic acid content in vinegar EQP titration NaOH DG111

M401 Ammonium chloride content EQP titration NaOH DG111

M402 Free fatty acid content EQP titration KOH in Ethanol DG113

M403 Blank solvent FFA EQP titration KOH in Ethanol DG113

M404 Chloride content in Ketchup EQP titration AgNO3 DM141

M405 Total hardness of tap water EQP titration EDTA DP5

M406 Ca + Mg content of tap water EQP titration EDTA Ca ISE

M407 Sulfate content EQP titration BaCl2 Ba ISE

M408 Barium content conductometric EQP titration Li2SO4 InLab717

M409 Copper content EQP titration Na2S2O3 DM140

M410 Hydrogen peroxide content EQP titration KMnO4 DM140

M411 Vitamin C content voltametric EQP titration DPI DM143

M412 Vitamin C content amperometric EQP titration DPI DM143

M413 SDS content photometric EQP titration Hyamine DP5

M414 SDS content potentiometric EQP titration Hyamine DS500

M415 m-Value of tap water (EP) EP titration HCl DG111

M416 p-Value of tap water (EP) EP titration NaOH DG111

M417 Antacid (Stating) pH stating NaOH DG111

M418 HCl content (EP) EP titration NaOH DG111

M419 Free SO2 content in wine (EP) EP titration I2 DM143

M420 Water content KF (EP) EP titration Composite 5 DM143

M421 Titer KF (EP) EP titration Composite 5 DM143

M422 Drift KF (EP) EP titration Composite 5 DM143

M423 Standby KF (EP) EP titration Composite 5 DM143

M424 Bromine number ASTM D1159 (EP) EP titration Bromide, bromate DM143

M425 Blank ASTM D1159 (EP) EP titration Bromide, bromate DM143

M426 Acid number ASTM D664 EQP titration KOH in 2-propanol DG113

M427 Blank ASTM D664 (EP) EP titration KOH in 2-propanol DG113

M428 Base number ASTM D4739 EQP titration HCl in 2-propanol DG113

M429 Blank ASTM D4739 EQP titration HCl in 2-propanol DG113

M430 Base number ASTM D2896 EQP titration HClO4 in acetic acid DG113

M431 Blank ASTM D2896 EQP titration HClO4 in acetic acid DG113

M432 Chloride content in motor oil EQP titration AgNO3 in 2-propanol DM141

M433 Mercaptan sulfur ASTM D3227 EQP titration AgNO3 in 2-propanol DM141

M434 SDS content (2-phase) 2P titration Hyamine 1622 DP5

M435 Titer 0.1 mol/L NaOH EQP titration 0.1M NaOH DG111

M436 Calibration DG111-SC Measure DG111-SC

M437 HCl content conductometric EQP titration NaOH InLab717

Appendix

190 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

10.3 Application Modes

An application mode can be selected in the Control subfunction for the EQP and EP titration method functions if the "control" setting is not set to "User". Application modes are available for various types of titration (acid/base, redox, argentometry, etc.). If an application mode is selected, the settings for the Control subfunction will be specified based on what is best for the primary uses for the corresponding type of titration. The user can choose between three different parameter sets for each application mode (Control "Normal", "Fast" and "Slow").

Sensor type

Unit Unit fordE (set value) and dE

Mode

pHpH

mVAcid/Base

mV Acid/Base (non aqu.)

mV mV mV

Precipitation

Precipitation (non aqu.)

Redox

ISE

mV

mV Precipitationppm

pX

pM

Phototrode

mV

mV

Precipitation

%TComplexation

A

PolarizedmV mV Redox

µA µA Redox

Temp.

°C

°C, °F, K Acid/Base°F

K

Cond.

mS

µS, mS

Acid/Base

µS

PrecipitationmS/cm

µS/cm

Appendix

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 191

10.4 Method Templates

When establishing a new method, the method templates preset the sequence of the method functions. These method templates are not application-specific, but are dependent on the type of titrator. They allow the user to establish user methods quickly and easily. Most of the settings in the method functions that occur in a standard method already have default values.To convert a method template into a user method, it has to be saved under a method ID.

Title Type of instrument Type of method

EQP T50/T70/T90 General titration

EP T50/T70/T90 General titration

Stating T50/T70/T90 General titration

Measure T50/T70/T90 General titration

2-phase T50/T70/T90 General titration

EQP detection T50/T70/T90 General titration

Titer with EQP T50/T70/T90 Titer determination

Titer with EP T50/T70/T90 Titer determination

Calibration T50/T70/T90 Calibration

Segmented calibration T50/T70/T90 Calibration

Blank with EQP T50/T70/T90 General titration

Blank with EP T50/T70/T90 General titration

EP/EQP T50/T70/T90 General titration

EQP/EQP T50/T70/T90 General titration

EP/EP T50/T70/T90 General titration

Titer with EQP & EQP T70/T90 General titration

Titer with EP & EP T70/T90 General titration

Calibration & EQP T70/T90 General titration

Calibration & EP T70/T90 General titration

Calibration & titer with EQP & EQP T70/T90 General titration

Calibration & titer with EP & EP T70/T90 General titration

Appendix

192 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Index

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 193

Index

Symbole24V output 38

AAccompanying stating EP 108Accompanying stating EQP 104Action when an expiration date is exceeded 49Action when life span exceeded 50Adding a conductivity calibration standard 17Adding an ISE calibration standard 16Adding a pH calibration standard 16Add result 153Adjusting the display 40Adjusting the sound 41All results 153Analysis data 159Analysis data, naming conventions 161Analysis data in formulas 166Analysis procedure settings 48Analysis sequence 147, 150Analysis start 147Analysis start screen 8Appendix 181Application Modes 190Asymmetric evaluation procedure 176Auto pH calibration standard list 16Auto titration stand 36Auxiliary instrument 90Auxiliary instrument, manual 134Auxiliary instruments 38

24V output 38RS-232 39Stirrer (0-18V output) 39TTL (multipin) 39TTL input (single pin) 39TTL out (single pin) 38

Auxiliary reagents 14Auxiliary value 88

BBlank value 89Board data 56Burette, manual operations 129Burettes 57

CCalculation 82Calibration 87Calibration standards 15Calibration Standards, predefined 181

Chemicals 13Auxiliary reagents 14Calibration standards 15Substances 18Titer standards 18Titrants 13

Conditioning 79Conductivity Sensor, measurement 128Conducts an equivalent-point titration. 100Configuring a USB stick 32Configuring sensors 19

Conductivity sensors 25Ion-selective sensors (ISE sensors) 27mV sensors 20Phototrode 23pH sensors 20Polarized sensors 23Temperature sensors 24

Configuring system settings 43Date/Time 44Header and footer 44Titrator identification 43

Configuring the balance 30METTLER TOLEDO Balances 30Others 31Sartorius 31

Configuring the barcode reader 32Connecting the TBox 35Constants within a Content Calculation 178Content Calculation 178Control band 122Control stirrer 124Creating auxiliary values 53Creating blanks 52Currently running tasks 7

DData Storage 45Date/Time 44Defining account guidelines 47Defining pumps 29Delete all results 158Delete data when instrument is shut down 45Deleting Methods 66Direct shortcuts 8Dispense (controlled) 120Dispense (normal) 81Dispense, manual 130Drain 84Drives 57

Index

194 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

EEnd-point titration 105End of sample 86Entering Data 6EP Titration 105EQP Titration 100Establishing Methods 64Evaluate and calculate 159Evaluation procedure 174Examples explanatory 169Expiration date and life span 58Expiration date exceeded 49Expiration dates monitoring 58Explanatory examples 169Exporting data 55External titration stand 36

FFooter und header 44Formulas 165Free sample series 143Functional Description 3Functions and Operators 166

GGlobal settings 43

Performance of analyses and resources 48System 43User management 45

HHardware 19

Auxiliary instruments 38Peripherals 29Pump 29Sensors 19Titration stands 35

Header and footer 44Home Screen 5

IIdentification titrator 43Importing / Exporting data 55Importing data 55Indexing of method functions 160Infobutton 3Instruction 93Introduction 1ISE Sensors 27

LLayout of the Terminal 3Learning Titration (EQP) 114Life span exceeded 50Life span monitoring 59Linear calibration 60

Lists, sorting 7Loops 63Loops, possible Number 68Loops Entering and Deleting 69

MManaging groups 46Managing shortcuts 41Manual 123Manual operations 123

Auxiliary instrument 134Burette 129Pump 134Sample Changer 138Sensor 124Stirrer 124

Manual titration 131Manual titration stand 36Mathematical Functions and Operators 166Measure (MVT) 98Measure (normal) 95Menu structure 12Method editor 63Method Functions, Overview 72Method Functions, possible Number 67Method Function Settings 73

Auxiliary instrument 90Auxiliary value 88Blank value 89Calculation 82Calibration 87Conditioning 79Dispense (controlled) 120Dispense (normal) 81Drain 84End of sample 86Instruction 93Measure (MVT) 98Measure (normal) 95Park 80Pump 80Record 85Rinse 78Sample 74Sample (calibration) 75Sample (titer) 75Stating 116Stir 81Titer 86Title 73Titration (2-phase) 109Titration (EP) 105Titration (EQP) 100Titration (EQP detection) 114Titration stand 76

Method Functions Outside of a Loop 71Method Functions Within a Loop 70

Index

METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90 195

Method ID 63Methods 63Method syntax 67Method Templates 191Method types 63METTLER Methods 189METTLER TOLEDO Balances 30Minimum / Maximum 175Modifying Methods 65Monitoring life span 59Monitoring the expiration date 58Monitoring the expiration date and life span 58

Monitoring life span 59Monitoring the expiration date 58

Mounting titration stands 35Auto stand 36External stand 36Manual stand 36Rondo60 37RondolinoTTL 37

Move titration head (sample changer) 139Move titration head manual 139Move to position (sample changer) 138MT-Service 54mV sensors 20

NNaming conventions for using analysis data in calculations 161

OOnline screen 9Operating the Touchscreen 4Operators and Functions 166Other balances 31Outlier test 154

PPark 80Performance of analyses and resources 48

Action when an expiration date is exceeded 49Action when life span exceeded 50Analysis procedure settings 48Performance of resources 49

Performance of resources 49Peripherals 29

Balance 30Barcode reader 32PC settings 33Printer 33TBox 35USB stick 32

Phototrode 23pH sensors 20Polarized Sensor, measurement 126Polarized sensors 23Potentiometric Sensor, measurement 125

Preloaded methods 63Printer setup 33Pump 80Pump, manual 134Pump and stirrer identification 51

RRecalculate 156Record 85Reevaluate 157Reset 3Resetbutton 3Reset to factory settings 56Results 153Results of samples 156Rinse 78Rinse burette 129Rondo60 37RondolinoTTL 37RS-232 39

SSample 74Sample (calibration) 75Sample (titer) 75Sample Changer, manual 138

Move titration head 139Move to position 138Pump 139Rinse 139

Sample formulas 177Sample parameters 144Sample series 141Sartorius balances 31Segmented calibration 61Segmented evaluation procedure 175Sensor calibration 60

Linear calibration 60Segmented calibration 61

Sensor Measuring Units 122Series sequence [T90] 142Series templates 141Service & maintenance 54

Burettes 57Drives 57Importing / Exporting data 55MT-Service 54Reset to factory settings 56Software history 56Terminal 56

Settings, global 43Setting the language 40Setup 11Setup menu 12Shortcuts 8Software history 56Sorting Lists 7

Index

196 METTLER TOLEDO T50 / T70 / T90

Specifying PC settings 33Specify keyboard layout 42Standard Evaluation Procedure 174Starting Methods 64Starting Methods from the Method Editor 64Stating 116Stating method function 172Statistics 154Stir 81Stirrer (0-18V output) 39Substances 18

TTemperature sensor, measurement 125Temperature sensors 24Terminal 56The Task Menu (T70/T90 only) 7The User Interface 4Time and date 44Titer 86Titerstandards 18Title 73Titrants 13Titration (2-phase) 109Titration (EP) 105Titration (EQP) 100Titration (EQP detection) 114Titration manual 131Titration method function 169Titration stand 76Titrator identification 43TTL (multipin) 39TTL input (single pin) 39TTL out (single pin) 38Two-phase titration 109Types of Loops 68Types of Methods 68

UUndo changes 158User management 45

Defining account guidelines 47Managing groups 46User management 45

User settings 40Keyboards 42Language 40Screen 40Shortcuts 41Sounds 41

Use sensor 124Using analysis data in formulas 166

VValue Ranges from Sensor Measuring Units and Control Band 122Values 52

Auxiliary values 53Blanks 52

© Mettler-Toledo AG 2006, 2007 ME-51710389A Printed in Switzerland 0703/2.12

Mettler-Toledo AG, Analytical, Sonnenbergstrasse 74, CH-8603 Schwerzenbach, Switzerland Tel. ++41 (0)44 806 7711, Fax ++41 (0)44 806 7350

Subject to technical changes.

Printed on 100% chlorine-free paper, for the sake of our environment.

Quality certificate. Research, development, production and testing according to ISO 9001. Environmental management system according to ISO 14001.

Worldwide service. Our comprehensive network of services – one of the best in the world – ensures maximum availability and service for the life of your product.

«European Conformity». This symbol guarantees that our products conform to the most current directives.

On the Internet: Obtain important information about our products, services and company quickly and easily at http://www.mt.com.

*P51710389*